Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference January 2010 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
C O N T E N T S About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Objectives Audience xvii xvii xvii Documentation Conventions xvii Typographic Conventions xviii Command Syntax Conventions xviii Software Conventions xix Reader Alert Conventions xix Documentation Organization xix Cisco IOS Documentation Set xx Cisco IOS Documentation on Cisco.
Contents allocate MP-6 append-after MP-8 auto-bw (LSP Attributes) MP-9 bandwidth (LSP Attributes) MP-11 bgp default route-target filter bgp next-hop MP-15 bgp scan-time cell-packing class (MPLS) MP-13 MP-16 MP-18 MP-21 clear ip route vrf MP-23 clear ip rsvp hello bfd MP-24 clear ip rsvp hello instance counters MP-26 clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics MP-28 clear ip rsvp hello statistics clear ip rsvp msg-pacing clear mpls counters MP-30 MP-32 MP-33 clear mpls ip iprm counters c
Contents exclude-address MP-69 exit (LSP Attributes) MP-71 exit-address-family MP-72 exp MP-74 export map MP-77 extended-port MP-79 forward permit l2protocol import map index MP-81 MP-82 MP-84 inter-as-hybrid MP-86 interface auto-template interface xtagatm interworking MP-88 MP-89 MP-90 ip explicit-path MP-92 ip flow-cache mpls label-positions ip multicast mpls traffic-eng ip path-option MP-96 MP-97 ip route static inter-vrf ip route vrf MP-93 MP-98 MP-100 ip rsvp msg-pacing
Contents list (LSP Attributes) MP-130 lockdown (LSP Attributes) MP-131 match mpls-label MP-133 maximum routes MP-135 metric-style narrow MP-138 metric-style transition metric-style wide mls mpls MP-139 MP-140 MP-142 mls mpls (guaranteed bandwidth traffic engineering) mls mpls (recirculation) mpls atm control-vc mpls atm cos MP-145 MP-147 MP-149 mpls atm disable-headend-vc mpls atm multi-vc mpls atm vpi MP-150 MP-151 MP-152 mpls atm vp-tunnel MP-154 mpls bgp forwarding mpls control-w
Contents mpls label protocol (interface configuration) mpls label range MP-191 MP-193 mpls ldp address-message MP-196 mpls ldp advertise-labels MP-198 mpls ldp advertise-labels old-style mpls ldp atm control-mode mpls ldp atm vc-merge mpls ldp autoconfig mpls ldp backoff MP-202 MP-204 MP-206 MP-208 MP-210 mpls ldp discovery MP-212 mpls ldp discovery transport-address mpls ldp explicit-null MP-215 MP-217 mpls ldp graceful-restart MP-219 mpls ldp graceful-restart timers forwarding-holding
Contents mpls ldp router-id MP-262 mpls ldp session protection mpls ldp sync MP-265 MP-267 mpls ldp tcp pak-priority MP-269 mpls load-balance per-label mpls mtu MP-272 mpls netflow egress mpls oam MP-271 MP-276 MP-277 mpls prefix-map MP-278 mpls request-labels for MP-279 mpls static binding ipv4 MP-281 mpls static binding ipv4 vrf mpls static crossconnect mpls traffic-eng MP-284 MP-286 MP-287 mpls traffic-eng administrative-weight mpls traffic-eng area MP-288 MP-289 mpls traffic-en
Contents mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model mpls traffic-eng ds-te mode MP-315 MP-316 mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute backup-prot-preemption mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute timers MP-319 mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds MP-320 mpls traffic-eng interface MP-317 MP-322 mpls traffic-eng link timers bandwidth-hold MP-323 mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding MP-324 mpls traffic-eng link-management timers bandwidth-hold mpls traffic-eng link-management timers periodic-flooding mpls traffic-e
Contents neighbor send-label MP-369 neighbor send-label explicit-null next-address oam retry MP-373 MP-375 oam-ac emulation-enable oam-pvc MP-378 MP-380 ping mpls MP-383 preferred-path MP-392 priority (LSP Attributes) MP-394 protection (LSP Attributes) MP-396 protection local-prefixes pseudowire MP-397 MP-399 pseudowire-class rd MP-371 MP-401 MP-403 record-route (LSP Attributes) route-target MP-406 sequencing MP-409 set extcomm-list delete set mpls experimental MP-405 MP-411 MP
Contents show ip bgp labels MP-460 show ip bgp neighbors show ip bgp vpnv4 MP-462 MP-474 show ip explicit-paths MP-483 show ip multicast mpls vif MP-485 show ip ospf database opaque-area show ip ospf mpls ldp interface MP-488 show ip ospf mpls traffic-eng show ip protocols vrf show ip route MP-486 MP-490 MP-492 MP-494 show ip route vrf MP-502 show ip rsvp fast bw-protect show ip rsvp fast detail show ip rsvp hello MP-506 MP-508 MP-511 show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr MP-513 show ip rsvp h
Contents show issu negotiated show issu sessions MP-572 MP-574 show mpls atm-ldp bindings MP-577 show mpls atm-ldp bindwait MP-580 show mpls atm-ldp capability MP-582 sshow mpls atm-ldp summary MP-585 show mpls cos-map MP-587 show mpls flow mappings MP-589 show mpls forwarding vrf MP-591 show mpls forwarding-table MP-593 show mpls interfaces MP-601 show mpls ip binding MP-606 show mpls ip iprm counters MP-617 show mpls ip iprm ldm MP-620 show mpls l2 vc detail MP-623 show mpls l
Contents show mpls static crossconnect MP-693 show mpls traffic tunnel backup MP-694 show mpls traffic-eng autoroute MP-696 show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh show mpls traffic-eng destination list MP-698 MP-700 show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database MP-701 show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set MP-706 MP-708 MP-710 show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics MP-712 show mpls traffic-eng li
Contents snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp MP-795 snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp MP-798 snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn MP-801 snmp-server enable traps mpls traffic-eng snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn snmp-server group snmp-server host MP-813 status redundancy MP-821 MP-822 MP-823 ttag-control-protocol vsi trace mpls MP-806 MP-809 status (pseudowire class) switching tlv MP-804 MP-825 MP-829 trace mpls multipath MP-836 traffic-engineering filter MP-840 traffic-engineeri
Contents tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option MP-876 tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect MP-878 tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority MP-882 tunnel mpls traffic-eng record-route tunnel tsp-hop vpn id MP-884 MP-886 MP-887 vrf definition vrf forwarding MP-889 MP-891 vrf selection source vrf upgrade-cli xconnect MP-880 MP-892 MP-894 MP-896 xconnect logging pseudowire status MP-900 Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference Janua
Contents Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference xvi January 2010
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Last Updated: November 20, 2009 This document describes the objectives, audience, conventions, and organization used in Cisco IOS software documentation. Also included are resources for obtaining technical assistance, additional documentation, and other information from Cisco.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Conventions This section contains the following topics: • Typographic Conventions, page xviii • Command Syntax Conventions, page xviii • Software Conventions, page xix • Reader Alert Conventions, page xix Typographic Conventions Cisco IOS documentation uses the following typographic conventions: Convention Description ^ or Ctrl Both the ^ symbol and Ctrl represent the Control (Ctrl) key on a keyboard.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Software Conventions Cisco IOS software uses the following program code conventions: Convention Description Courier font Courier font is used for information that is displayed on a PC or terminal screen. Bold Courier font Bold Courier font indicates text that the user must enter. < > ! [ Angle brackets enclose text that is not displayed, such as a password.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Cisco IOS Documentation Set The Cisco IOS documentation set consists of the following: • Release notes and caveats provide information about platform, technology, and feature support for a release and describe severity 1 (catastrophic), severity 2 (severe), and select severity 3 (moderate) defects in released Cisco IOS software. Review release notes before other documents to learn whether updates have been made to a feature.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Command References Command reference books contain descriptions of Cisco IOS commands that are supported in many different software releases and on many different platforms. The books are organized by technology. For information about all Cisco IOS commands, use the Command Lookup Tool at http://tools.cisco.com/Support/CLILookup or the Cisco IOS Master Command List, All Releases, at http://www.cisco.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles • Cisco IOS Bridging and IBM Networking Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Bridging Command Reference • Cisco IOS IBM Networking Command Reference • Cisco IOS Broadband Access Aggregation and DSL Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Broadband Access Aggregation and DSL Command Reference • Cisco IOS Carrier Ethernet
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles Features/Protocols/Technologies A variety of high availability (HA) features and technologies that are available for different network segments (from enterprise access to service provider core) to facilitate creation of end-to-end highly available networks.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles Features/Protocols/Technologies On-Demand Routing (ODR).
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles • Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference • Cisco IOS Multi-Topology Routing Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Multi-Topology Routing Command Reference • Cisco IOS NetFlow Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS NetFlow Command Reference
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles Features/Protocols/Technologies • Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide: Securing User Services AAA (includes 802.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Documentation Organization Table 1 Cisco IOS Configuration Guides and Command References (continued) Configuration Guide and Command Reference Titles • Cisco IOS Wide-Area Networking Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Wide-Area Networking Command Reference • Cisco IOS Wireless LAN Configuration Guide • Cisco IOS Wireless LAN Command Reference Features/Protocols/Technologies Frame Relay; Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol Version 3 (L2TPv3); L2VPN Pseudowire Redundancy; L2
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Additional Resources and Documentation Feedback Additional Resources and Documentation Feedback What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation is released monthly and describes all new and revised Cisco technical documentation.
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Additional Resources and Documentation Feedback CCDE, CCENT, CCSI, Cisco Eos, Cisco HealthPresence, Cisco IronPort, the Cisco logo, Cisco Nurse Connect, Cisco Pulse, Cisco SensorBase, Cisco StackPower, Cisco StadiumVision, Cisco TelePresence, Cisco Unified Computing System, Cisco WebEx, DCE, Flip Channels, Flip for Good, Flip Mino, Flipshare (Design), Flip Ultra, Flip Video, Flip Video (Design), Instant Broadband, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks; Chang
About Cisco IOS Software Documentation Additional Resources and Documentation Feedback xxx
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Last Updated: October 14, 2009 This document provides basic information about the command-line interface (CLI) in Cisco IOS software and how you can use some of the CLI features.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Changing the Default Settings for a Console or AUX Port There are only two changes that you can make to a console port and an AUX port: Note • Change the port speed with the config-register 0x command. Changing the port speed is not recommended. The well-known default speed is 9600. • Change the behavior of the port; for example, by adding a password or changing the timeout value.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Table 3 CLI Command Modes Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method User EXEC Log in. Router> Issue the logout or exit command. Privileged EXEC From user EXEC mode, issue the enable command. Router# Issue the disable command or the exit command to return to user EXEC mode. Mode Usage • Change terminal settings. • Perform basic tests. • Display device status. • Issue show and debug commands.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Table 3 CLI Command Modes (continued) Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method ROM monitor From privileged EXEC mode, issue the reload command. Press the Break key during the first 60 seconds while the system is booting. rommon # > Issue the continue command. Diagnostic (available only on Cisco ASR 1000 series routers) The router boots or enters diagnostic mode in the following scenarios.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI EXEC commands are not saved when the software reboots. Commands that you issue in a configuration mode can be saved to the startup configuration. If you save the running configuration to the startup configuration, these commands will execute when the software is rebooted. Global configuration mode is the highest level of configuration mode.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI The following examples show how to use the help commands: help Router> help Help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty and you must backup until entering a '?' shows the available options. Two styles of help are provided: 1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (e.g. 'show ?') and describes each possible argument. 2.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Table 5 CLI Syntax Conventions Symbol/Text Function Notes < > (angle brackets) Indicate that the option is an argument. Sometimes arguments are displayed without angle brackets. A.B.C.D. Indicates that you must enter a dotted decimal IP address. Angle brackets (< >) are not always used to indicate that an IP address is an argument. WORD (all capital letters) Indicates that you must enter one word.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Using an enable secret password is recommended because it is encrypted and more secure than the enable password. When you use an enable secret password, text is encrypted (unreadable) before it is written to the config.text file. When you use an enable password, the text is written as entered (readable) to the config.text file.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI The command history feature is enabled by default. To disable this feature for a terminal session, issue the terminal no history command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode or the no history command in line configuration mode. Abbreviating Commands Typing a complete command name is not always required for the command to execute.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Using the CLI Using the no and default Forms of Commands Most configuration commands have a no form that is used to reset a command to its default value or disable a feature or function. For example, the ip routing command is enabled by default. To disable this command, you would issue the no ip routing command. To re-enable IP routing, you would issue the ip routing command.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Saving Changes to a Configuration The following example illustrates how to filter output of the show interface command to display only lines that include the expression “protocol.
Using the Command-Line Interface in Cisco IOS Software Additional Information Building configuration... [OK] Router# On most platforms, the configuration is saved to NVRAM. On platforms with a Class A flash file system, the configuration is saved to the location specified by the CONFIG_FILE environment variable. The CONFIG_FILE variable defaults to NVRAM.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference January 2010 MP-1
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands address-family address-family To enter the address family submode for configuring routing protocols such as Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Routing Information Protocol (RIP), and static routing, use the address-family command in address family configuration submode. To disable the address family submode for configuring routing protocols, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands address-family Usage Guidelines Using the address-family command puts the router in address family configuration submode (prompt: (config-router-af)# ). Within this submode, you can configure address-family specific parameters for routing protocols, such as BGP, that can accommodate multiple Layer 3 address families. To leave address family configuration submode and return to router configuration mode, enter the exit-address-family or exit command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands affinity (LSP Attributes) affinity (LSP Attributes) To specify attribute flags for links of a label switched path (LSP) in an LSP attribute list, use the affinity command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To remove the specified attribute flags, use the no form of this command. affinity value [mask value] no affinity Syntax Description value Attribute flag value required for links that make up an LSP. Values of the bits are either 0 or 1.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands affinity (LSP Attributes) Examples The following example sets the affinity values for a path option in an LSP attribute list: configure terminal ! mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes 1 affinity 0 mask 0 exit end Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Creates or modifies an LSP attribute list. show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Displays global LSP attribute lists.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands allocate allocate To configure local label allocation filters for learned routes for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), use the allocate command in MPLS LDP label configuration mode. To remove the specific MPLS LDP local label allocation filter without resetting the LDP session, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands allocate Examples The following example shows how to configure a prefix list named List1 found in the global routing table as a filter for MPLS LDP local label allocation: configure terminal ! mpls ldp label allocate global prefix-list List1 end LDP allocates local labels only for prefixes that match the configured prefix list.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands append-after append-after To insert a path entry after a specified index number, use the append-after command in IP explicit path configuration mode. append-after index command Syntax Description index Previous index number. Valid values are from 0 to 65534. command An IP explicit path configuration command that creates a path entry. (Use the next-address command to specify the next IP address in the explicit path.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands auto-bw (LSP Attributes) auto-bw (LSP Attributes) To specify automatic bandwidth configuration for a label switched path (LSP) in an LSP attribute list, use the auto-bw command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To remove automatic bandwidth configuration, use the no form of this command. auto-bw [frequency secs] [max-bw kbps] [min-bw kbps] [collect-bw] no auto-bw Syntax Description frequency secs (Optional) Interval between bandwidth adjustments.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands auto-bw (LSP Attributes) To constrain the bandwidth adjustment that can be made to an LSP in an LSP attribute list, use the max-bw or min-bw keyword and specify the permitted maximum allowable bandwidth or minimum allowable bandwidth, respectively.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bandwidth (LSP Attributes) bandwidth (LSP Attributes) To configure label switched path (LSP) bandwidth in an LSP attribute list, use the bandwidth command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To remove the configured bandwidth from the LSP attribute list, use the no form of this command. bandwidth [sub-pool | global] kbps no bandwidth Syntax Description sub-pool (Optional) Indicates a subpool path option. global (Optional) Indicates a global pool path option.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bandwidth (LSP Attributes) exit end Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Creates or modifies an LSP attribute list. show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Displays global LSP attribute lists.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bgp default route-target filter bgp default route-target filter To enable automatic Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) default route-target community filtering, use the bgp default route-target filter command in router configuration mode. To disable automatic BGP route-target community filtering, use the no form of this command. bgp default route-target filter no bgp default route-target filter Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bgp default route-target filter Related Commands Command Description show mpls forwarding-table Displays the contents of the LFIB.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bgp next-hop bgp next-hop To configure a loopback interface as the next hop for routes associated with a VPN routing and forwarding instance (VRF), use the bgp next-hop command in VRF configuration mode. To return the router to default operation, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bgp scan-time bgp scan-time To configure scanning intervals of Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routers for next hop validation or to decrease import processing time of Virtual Private Network version 4 (VPNv4) routing information, use the bgp scan-time command in address family or router configuration mode. To return the scanning interval of a router to its default scanning interval of 60 seconds, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands bgp scan-time Examples In the following router configuration example, the scanning interval for next hop validation of IPv4 unicast routes for BGP routing tables is set to 20 seconds: router bgp 100 no synchronization bgp scan-time 20 In the following address family configuration example, the scanning interval for next hop validation of address family VPNv4 unicast routes for BGP routing tables is set to 45 seconds: router bgp 150 address-family vpn4 unicast bgp sca
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands cell-packing cell-packing To enable ATM over Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol Version 3 (L2TPv3) to pack multiple ATM cells into each MPLS or L2TPv3 packet, use the cell-packing command in the appropriate configuration mode. To disable cell packing, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands cell-packing Only cells from the same VC or VP can be packed into one MPLS or L2TPv3 packet. Cells from different connections cannot be concatenated into the same packet. When you change, enable, or disable the cell-packing attributes, the ATM VC or VP and the MPLS or L2TPv3 emulated VC are reestablished. If a provider edge (PE) router does not support cell packing, the PE router sends only one cell per MPLS or L2TPv3 packet.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands cell-packing Related Commands Command Description atm mcpt-timers Creates cell-packing timers, which specify how long the PE router can wait for cells to be packed into an MPLS or L2TPv3 packet. debug atm cell-packing Displays ATM cell relay cell packing debugging information. show atm cell-packing Displays information about the VCs and VPs that have ATM cell packing enabled.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands class (MPLS) class (MPLS) To configure a defined Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) class of service (CoS) map that specifies how classes map to label switched controlled virtual circuits (LVCs) when combined with a prefix map, use the class command in CoS map submode. To remove the defined MPLS CoS map, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands class (MPLS) Command Description mpls prefix-map Configures a router to use a specified quality of service (QoS) map when a label definition prefix matches the specified access list. show mpls cos-map Displays the CoS map used to assign quantity of LVCs and associated CoS of those LVCs.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip route vrf clear ip route vrf To remove routes from the Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding(VRF) table, use the clear ip route vrf command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. clear ip route vrf vrf-name {* | network [mask]} Syntax Description vrf-name Name of the VRF for the static route. * Indicates all routes for a given VRF. network Destination to be removed, in dotted decimal format.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello bfd clear ip rsvp hello bfd To globally reset to zero the number of times that the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol was dropped on an interface or the number of times that a link was down, use the clear ip rsvp hello bfd command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. To disable the resetting of those counters, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello bfd Related Commands Command Description show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr Displays information about all MPLS TE clients that use the BFD protocol. show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail Displays detailed information about all MPLS TE clients that use the BFD protocol. show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary Displays summarized information about all MPLS TE clients that use the BFD protocol.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello instance counters clear ip rsvp hello instance counters To clear (refresh) the values for Hello instance counters, use the clear ip rsvp hello instance counters command in privileged EXEC mode. clear ip rsvp hello instance counters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default None Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello instance counters Src_instance 0xA9F07C13, Dst_instance 0x9BBAA407 Counters: Communication with neighbor lost: Num times: 0 Reasons: Missed acks: 0 Bad Src_Inst received: 0 Bad Dst_Inst received: 0 I/F went down: 0 Neighbor disabled Hello: 0 Msgs Received: 2398194 Sent: 2398195 Suppressed: 0 Router# clear ip rsvp hello instance counters Neighbor 10.0.0.2 Source 10.0.0.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics To clear Hello statistics for an instance, use the clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics command in privileged EXEC mode. clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Hello statistics are not cleared for an instance. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello instance statistics Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp signalling hello (configuration) Enables Hello globally on the router. ip rsvp signalling hello (interface) Enables Hello on an interface where you need Fast Reroute protection. ip rsvp signalling hello statistics Enables Hello statistics on the router. show ip rsvp hello statistics Displays how long Hello packets have been in the Hello input queue.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello statistics clear ip rsvp hello statistics To globally clear Hello statistics, use the clear ip rsvp hello statistics command in privileged EXEC mode. clear ip rsvp hello statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Hello statistics are not globally cleared. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp hello statistics Router# clear ip rsvp hello statistics Status: Enabled Packet arrival queue: Wait times (msec) Current:0 Average:0 Weighted Average:0 (weight = 0.8) Max:0 Current length: 0 (max:500) Number of samples taken: 16 Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp signalling hello statistics Enables Hello statistics on the router. show ip rsvp hello statistics Displays how long Hello packets have been in the Hello input queue.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear ip rsvp msg-pacing clear ip rsvp msg-pacing To clear the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) message pacing output from the show ip rsvp neighbor command, use the clear ip rsvp msg-pacing command in privileged EXEC mode. clear ip rsvp msg-pacing Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(14)ST This command was introduced. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls counters clear mpls counters To clear the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwarding table disposition counters and the Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) imposition and disposition virtual circuit (VC) counters, use the clear mpls counters command in privileged EXEC mode. clear mpls counters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Checkpoint information resides on the active and standby Route Processor.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls counters In the following example, the first show mpls l2 vc detail command shows that 15 packets were received and sent, 1656 bytes were received, and 1986 bytes were sent. The clear mpls counters command clears the counters. The second show mpls l2 transport vc detail command shows that no bytes or packets were received or sent. Router# show mpls l2 vc detail Local interface: Et0/0.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls ip iprm counters clear mpls ip iprm counters To clear the IP Rewrite Manager (IPRM) counters, use the clear mpls ip iprm counters command in privileged EXEC mode. clear mpls ip iprm counters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls ldp checkpoint clear mpls ldp checkpoint To clear the checkpoint information from the Label Information Base (LIB) entries on the active Route Processor (RP) or PRE and to clear the LIB entries created by checkpointing on the standby RP or PRE, use the clear mpls ldp checkpoint command in privileged EXEC mode.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls ldp checkpoint Examples The command in the following example clears the checkpointing information for prefix 10.1.10.1: Router(config)# clear mpls ldp checkpoint 10.1.10.1 32 Clear LDP bindings checkpoint state [confirm] 00:20:29: %LDP-5-CLEAR_CHKPT: Clear LDP bindings checkpoint state (*) by console Related Commands Command Description show mpls ldp checkpoint Displays information about the LDP checkpoint system on the active RP.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls ldp neighbor clear mpls ldp neighbor To forcibly reset a label distribution protocol (LDP) session, use the clear mpls ldp neighbor command in privileged EXEC mode. clear mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vpn-name] {nbr-address | *} Syntax Description vrf vpn-name (Optional) Specifies the VPN routing and forwarding instance (vpn-name) for resetting an LDP session. nbr-address Specifies the address of the LDP neighbor whose session will be reset.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls ldp neighbor To verify the results of the clear mpls ldp neighbor command, enter the show mpls ldp neighbor command. Notice the value in the “Up time” field. Router# show mpls ldp neighbor 10.12.12.12 Peer LDP Ident: 10.12.12.12:0; Local LDP Ident 10.13.13.13:0 TCP connection: 10.12.12.12.646 - 10.13.13.13.15093 State: Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd: 142/138; Downstream Up time: 02:16:28 LDP discovery sources: Serial1/0, Src IP addr: 10.0.0.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers clear mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers To reinitialize the automatic bandwidth adjustment feature on a platform, use the clear mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers command in user EXEC mode. clear mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults There are no defaults for this command. Command Modes User EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers Enables automatic bandwidth adjustment on a platform for tunnels configured for bandwidth adjustment. tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw Enables automatic bandwidth adjustment for a tunnel, specifies the frequency with which tunnel bandwidth can be automatically adjusted, and designates the allowable range of bandwidth adjustments.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh To remove all mesh tunnel interfaces and re-create them, use the clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh command in privileged EXEC mode. clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(27)S This command was introduced. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup To remove all the backup autotunnels and re-create them, use the clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup command in global configuration mode. clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default No default behavior or values Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary To remove all the primary autotunnels and re-create them, use the clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary command in global configuration mode. clear mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default None Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear mpls traffic-eng tunnel counters clear mpls traffic-eng tunnel counters To clear the counters for all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnels, use the clear mpls traffic-eng tunnel counters command in privileged EXEC mode. clear mpls traffic-eng tunnel counters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear xconnect clear xconnect To remove xconnect attachment circuits and pseudowires, use the clear xconnect command in privileged EXEC configuration mode. clear xconnect {all | interface interface | peer ip-address {all | vcid vc-id}} Syntax Description all Removes all xconnect attachment circuits and pseudowires. interface interface Removes xconnect attachment circuits and pseudowires on the specified interface.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear xconnect 02:13:56: XC AUTH [10.1.1.2, 1234001]: Event: start xconnect authorization, state changed from IDLE to AUTHORIZING 02:13:56: XC AUTH [10.1.1.2, 1234001]: Event: found xconnect authorization, state changed from AUTHORIZING to DONE 02:13:56: XC AUTH [10.1.2.2, 1234003]: Event: start xconnect authorization, state changed from IDLE to AUTHORIZING 02:13:56: XC AUTH [10.1.2.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands clear xconnect 02:14:48: Xconnect[mpls:10.1.1.2:1234000]: provisioning fwder with fwd_type=2, sss_role=1 02:14:48: MPLS peer 10.1.1.2 vcid 1234000, VC DOWN, VC state DOWN 02:14:48: XC AUTH [10.1.1.2, 1234000]: Event: start xconnect authorization, state changed from IDLE to AUTHORIZING 02:14:48: XC AUTH [10.1.1.2, 1234000]: Event: found xconnect authorization, state changed from AUTHORIZING to DONE 02:14:48: XC AUTH [10.1.1.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands connect (Frame Relay) connect (Frame Relay) To define connections between Frame Relay permanent virtual circuits (PVCs), use the connect command in global configuration mode. To remove connections, use the no form of this command. connect connection-name interface dlci {interface dlci | l2transport} no connect connection-name interface dlci {interface dlci | l2transport} Syntax Description connection-name A name for this connection.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands connect (Frame Relay) The following example shows how to enable Frame Relay switching and define a connection called “one” between DLCI 16 on serial interface 0 and DLCI 100 on serial interface 1. frame-relay switching connect one serial0 16 serial1 100 Related Commands Command Description frame-relay switching Enables PVC switching on a Frame Relay DCE or NNI. mpls l2transport route Enables routing of Frame Relay packets over a specified VC.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands connect (L2VPN local switching) connect (L2VPN local switching) To create Layer 2 data connections between two ports on the same router, use the connect command in global configuration mode. To remove such connections, use the no form of this command. Syntax for 12.0S, 12.2S and 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands connect (L2VPN local switching) Command History Examples Release Modification 12.0(27)S This command was introduced for local switching. 12.2(25)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)S. 12.0(30)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(30)S. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB. 12.4(11)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.4(11)T. 12.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands context context To associate a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) context with a particular virtual private network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the context command in VRF configuration mode. To disassociate an SNMP context from a VPN, use the no form of this command. context context-name no context context-name Syntax Description context-name Command Default No SNMP contexts are associated with VPNs.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands context A route distinguisher (RD) is required when you configure an SNMP context. An RD creates routing and forwarding tables and specifies the default route distinguisher for a VPN. The RD is added to the beginning of a IPv4 prefix to make it globally unique. An RD is either ASN relative, which means it is composed of an autonomous system number and an arbitrary number, or it is IP address relative and composed of an IP address and an arbitrary number.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands control-word control-word To enable the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) control word in an Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) dynamic pseudowire connection, use the control-word command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To set the control word to autosense mode, use the default control-word command. To disable the control word, use the no form of this command.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands control-word Related Commands Command Description mpls control-word Enables the MPLS control word in an AToM static pseudowire connection. show mpls l2transport Displays VC label binding information. binding show mpls l2transport Displays information about AToM VCs and AToM static pseudowires that vc have been enabled to route Layer 2 packets on a router. xconnect Binds an attachment circuit to a pseudowire, and configures an AToM static pseudowire.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Commands description (l2 vfi) description (l2 vfi) To provide a description of the switching provider edge (PE) router for an L2VPN multisegment pseudowire, use the description command in L2 VFI configuration mode. To remove the description, use the no form of this command. description string no description string Syntax Description string Command Default The switching PE router does not have a description.
echo echo To customize the default behavior of echo packets, use the echo command in MPLS OAM configuration mode. To set the echo packet’s behavior to its default value, use the no form of this command. echo {revision {3 | 4} | vendor-extension} no echo {revision {3 | 4} | vendor-extension} Syntax Description revision vendor-extension Specifies the revision number of the echo packet’s default values.
echo routers in the network to operate in Revision 3 mode. Revision 3 mode is used only with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) LSP ping or traceroute. Revision 3 mode does not support MPLS multipath LSP traceroute. The vendor-extension keyword is enabled by default in the router. If your network includes routers that are not Cisco routers, you may want to disable Cisco extended TLVs. To disable Cisco extended TLVs, specify the no echo vendor-extension command in MPLS OAM configuration mode.
encapsulation (Any Transport over MPLS) encapsulation (Any Transport over MPLS) To configure the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) encapsulation for an Any Transport over MPLS (AToM), use the encapsulation command in the appropriate configuration mode. To remove the ATM encapsulation, use the no form of this command.
encapsulation (Any Transport over MPLS) Table 8 AToM-Specific Variations of the pvc and encapsulation Commands Other Applications AToM Router(config-if)# pvc 1/100 Router(config-if-atm-vc)# encapsulation aal5snap Router(config-if)# pvc 1/100 l2transport Router(config-if-atm-l2trans-pvc)# encapsulation aal5 The following list highlights the differences: • pvc command: For most applications, you create a permanent virtual circuit (PVC) by using the pvc vpi/vci command.
encapsulation (Layer 2 local switching) encapsulation (Layer 2 local switching) To configure the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) for a Layer 2 local switching ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC), use the encapsulation command in ATM PVC L2transport configuration mode. To remove an encapsulation from a PVC, use the no form of this command. encapsulation layer-type no encapsulation layer-type Syntax Description Command Default layer-type Adaptation layer type.
encapsulation (Layer 2 local switching) Usage Guidelines The pvc command and the encapsulation command work together. The use of these commands with Layer 2 local switching is slightly different from the use of these commands with other applications. The following list highlights the differences: • For Layer 2 local switching, you must add the l2transport keyword to the pvc command. The l2transport keyword enables the PVC to transport Layer 2 packets.
encapsulation dot1q encapsulation dot1q To enable IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation of traffic on a specified subinterface in a virtual LAN (VLAN), use the encapsulation dot1q command in interface range configuration mode or subinterface configuration mode. To disable IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation, use the no form of this command.
encapsulation dot1q Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(1)T This command was introduced. 12.1(3)T The native keyword was added. 12.2(2)DD Configuration of this command in interface range mode was introduced. 12.2(4)B This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(4)B. 12.2(8)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(8)T. 12.3(7)T The second-dot1q keyword was added to support the IEEE 802.1Q-in-Q VLAN Tag Termination feature. 12.
encapsulation dot1q Examples The following example shows how to create the subinterfaces within the range 0.11 and 0.60 and apply VLAN ID 101 to the Fast Ethernet0/0.11 subinterface, VLAN ID 102 to Fast Ethernet0/0.12 (vlan-id = 101 + 12 – 11 = 102), and so on up to VLAN ID 150 to Fast Ethernet0/0.60 (vlan-id = 101 + 60 – 11 = 150): Router(config)# interface range fastethernet0/0.11 - fastethernet0/0.
encapsulation mpls encapsulation mpls To specify that Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) is used as the data encapsulation method for tunneling Layer 2 traffic over the pseudowire, use the encapsulation mpls command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To remove MPLS as the encapsulation method, use the no pseudowire-class command. encapsulation mpls no pseudowire-class Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values.
encapsulation mpls Related Commands Command Description encapsulation l2tpv3 Configures L2TPv3 as the data encapsulation method over IP networks. pseudowire-class Specifies the name of a pseudowire class and enters pseudowire class configuration mode.
exclude-address exclude-address To exclude an address from an IP explicit path, use the exclude-address command in global configuration mode after entering explicit path configuration mode via the ip-explicit path command. To remove an address exclusion from an IP explicit path, use the no index command. exclude-address A.B.C.D no index number Syntax Description A.B.C.D Excludes an address from subsequent partial path segments. You can enter the IP address of a link or the router ID of a node.
exclude-address Note Examples MPLS traffic engineering will accept an IP explicit path that comprises either all excluded addresses configured by the exclude-address command or all included addresses configured by the next-address command, but not a combination of both. The following example shows how to exclude IP addresses 10.0.0.125 and 10.0.0.135 from IP explicit path 500: Router(config-ip-expl-path)# exclude-address 10.0.0.125 Explicit Path identifier 500: 1: exclude-address 10.0.0.
exit (LSP Attributes) exit (LSP Attributes) To exit from the label switched path (LSP) attribute list, use the exit command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. exit Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default No default behavior or values. Command Modes LSP Attributes configuration (config-lsp-attr) Command History Release Modification 12.0(26)S This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
exit-address-family exit-address-family To exit from address family configuration mode, use the exit-address-family command in address family configuration mode. exit-address-family Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default No default behavior or values Command Modes Address family configuration Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)T This command was introduced. 12.
exit-address-family Related Commands Command Description address-family ipv4 Enters IPv4 address family configuration mode. address-family ipv6 Enters IPv6 address family configuration mode. address-family nsap Enters CLNS address family configuration mode. address-family vpnv4 Enters VPNv4 address family configuration mode.
exp exp To configure Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) experimental (EXP) levels for a Frame Relay permanent virtual circuit (PVC) bundle member, use the exp command in Frame Relay VC-bundle-member configuration mode. To remove the EXP level configuration from the PVC, use the no form of this command. exp {level | other} no exp Syntax Description level The MPLS EXP level or levels for this Frame Relay PVC bundle member. The range is from 0 to 7.
exp Usage Guidelines Assignment of MPLS EXP levels to Frame Relay PVC bundle members lets you create differentiated services, because you can distribute the levels over the various PVC bundle members. You can map a single level or a range of levels to each discrete PVC in the bundle, which enables PVCs in the bundle to carry packets marked with different levels. Use the exp other command to indicate that a PVC can carry traffic marked with EXP levels not specifically configured for other PVCs.
exp Command Description dscp (Frame Relay VC-bundle-member) Configures the DSCP value or values for a Frame Relay PVC bundle member. match Specifies which bits of the IP header to use for mapping packet service levels to Frame Relay PVC bundle members. mpls ip Enables label switching of IPv4 packets on an interface. precedence (Frame Relay Configures the precedence levels for a Frame Relay PVC bundle member.
export map export map To associate an export map with a VPN Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance, use the export map command in IP VRF configuration mode. export map route-map no export map route-map Syntax Description route-map Command Default No export maps are associated with a VRF instance. Command Modes IP VRF configuration Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)T This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
export map Related Commands Command Description import map Configures an import route map for a VRF. ip extcommunity-list Creates an extended community list for BGP and controls access to it. ip vrf Configures a VRF routing table. route-target Creates a route-target extended community for a VRF. show ip vrf Displays the set of defined VRFs and associated interfaces.
extended-port extended-port Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the extended-port command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To associate the currently selected extended Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM (XTagATM) interface with a particular external interface on the remotely controlled ATM switch, use the extended-port command in interface configuration mode.
extended-port The following example shows how to associate an extended MPLS ATM interface and bind it to port 2.4: ATM(config)# interface XTagATM24 ATM(config-if)# extended-port atm0/0 descriptor 0.2.4.
forward permit l2protocol forward permit l2protocol To define the VPLS pseudowire that is used to transport bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) information between two network provider edge (N-PE) routers, use the forward permit l2protocol command in Layer 2 VFI configuration mode. To remove the pseudowire, use the no form of this command. forward permit l2protocol all no forward permit l2protocol all Syntax Description all Command Default The VPLS pseudowire between the two N-PE routers is not created.
import map import map To configure an import route map for a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the import map command in VRF configuration submode. import map route-map Syntax Description route-map Defaults A VRF has no import route map unless one is configured using the import map command. Command Modes VRF configuration submode Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)T This command was introduced. 12.
import map Related Commands Command Description ip vrf Configures a VRF routing table. route-target Creates a route-target extended community for a VRF. show ip vrf Displays the set of defined VRFs and associated interfaces.
index index To insert or modify a path entry at a specific index, use the index command in IP explicit path configuration mode. To remove the path entry at the specified index, use the no form of this command. index index command no index index Syntax Description index Index number at which the path entry will be inserted or modified. Valid values are from 0 to 65534. command An IP explicit path configuration command that creates or modifies a path entry. (You can use only the next-address command.
index Related Commands Command Description append-after Inserts the new path entry after the specified index number. Commands might be renumbered as a result. interface fastethernet Enters the command mode for IP explicit paths and creates or modifies the specified path. list Displays all or part of the explicit paths. next-address Specifies the next IP address in the explicit path. show ip explicit-paths Displays the configured IP explicit paths.
inter-as-hybrid inter-as-hybrid To specify a VRF as an Option AB VRF, use the inter-as-hybrid command. Routes imported to this VRF can be advertised to Option AB peers and VPNv4 iBGP peers. When routes are received from Option AB peers and imported into the VRF, the next-hop tableid of the route is set to the tableid of the VRF.
inter-as-hybrid Related Commands Command Description address-family ipv4 Enters VRF address family configuration mode to specify an address family for a VRF. bgp neighbor inter-as-hybrid Configures the eBGP peer router (ASBR) as an Inter-AS Option AB peer. rd Creates routing and forwarding tables for a VPN. route-target Creates a route-target extended community for a VRF. vrf definition Defines the VPN routing instance by assigning a VRF name and enters VRF configuration mode.
interface auto-template interface auto-template To create the template interface, use the interface auto-template command in global configuration mode. To delete this interface, use the no form of this command. interface auto-template interface-num no interface auto-template Syntax Description interface-num Command Default No default behavior or values are required to create templates. Command Modes Global configuration (config)# Command History Release Modification 12.
interface xtagatm interface xtagatm Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the interface xtagatm command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To create an extended Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM (XTagATM) interface, use the interface xtagatm command in global configuration mode. interface xtagatm interface-number Syntax Description interface-number Defaults XTagATM interfaces are not created.
interworking interworking To enable the L2VPN Interworking feature, use the interworking command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To disable the L2VPN Interworking feature, use the no form of this command. interworking {ethernet | ip | vlan} no interworking {ethernet | ip | vlan} Syntax Description ethernet Causes Ethernet frames to be extracted from the attachment circuit and sent over the pseudowire. Ethernet end-to-end transmission is assumed.
interworking Usage Guidelines Table 10 shows which L2VPN Interworking features support Ethernet, IP, and VLAN types of interworking.
ip explicit-path ip explicit-path To enter the command mode for IP explicit paths and create or modify the specified path, use the ip explicit-path command in global configuration mode. An IP explicit path is a list of IP addresses, each representing a node or link in the explicit path. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
ip flow-cache mpls label-positions ip flow-cache mpls label-positions To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)-Aware NetFlow, use the ip flow-cache mpls label-positions command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS-aware NetFlow, use the no form of this command.
ip flow-cache mpls label-positions Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(24)S This command was introduced. 12.0(25)S The no-ip-fields and mpls-length keywords were. 12.3(8)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.3(8)T. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB. 12.2(31)SB2 This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(31)SB2. The exp-bgp-prefix-fields keyword was added.
ip flow-cache mpls label-positions Command Description ip flow-egress input-interface Removes the NetFlow egress accounting flow key that specifies an output interface and adds a flow key that specifies an input interface for NetFlow egress accounting. show ip cache flow Displays a summary of the NetFlow accounting statistics. show ip cache verbose flow Displays a detailed summary of the NetFlow accounting statistics. show ip flow interface Displays NetFlow accounting configuration for interfaces.
ip multicast mpls traffic-eng ip multicast mpls traffic-eng To enable IP multicast traffic on a tailend router enabled with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-multipoint (P2MP) functionality, use the ip multicast mpls traffic-eng command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable IP multicast for MPLS TE P2MP on tailend routers, use the no form of this command.
ip path-option ip path-option To specify an explicit or dynamic path option for a particular destination address in a destination list, use the ip path-option command in traffic engineering destination list configuration mode. To remove the path option, use the no form of this command. ip ip-address path-option id {dynamic | explicit {name name | identifier number} [verbatim]} no ip ip-address path-option id Syntax Description ip-address The destination address of the path.
ip route static inter-vrf ip route static inter-vrf To allow static routes to point to Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) interfaces other than those to which the static route belongs, use the ip route static inter-vrf command in global configuration mode. To prevent static routes from pointing to VRF interfaces in VRFs to which they do not belong, use the no form of this command.
ip route static inter-vrf If the static route is already configured that points to a VRF other than the one to which the route belongs when you issue the no ip route static inter-vrf command, the offending route is uninstalled from the routing table and a message similar to the following is sent to the console: 01:00:06: %IPRT-3-STATICROUTESACROSSVRF: Un-installing static route x.x.x.
ip route vrf ip route vrf To establish static routes for a Virtual private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the ip route vrf command in global configuration mode. To disable static routes, use the no form of this command.
ip route vrf Usage Guidelines Use a static route when the Cisco IOS software cannot dynamically build a route to the destination. If you specify an administrative distance when you set up a route, you are flagging a static route that can be overridden by dynamic information. For example, Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP)-derived routes have a default administrative distance of 100. To set a static route to be overridden by an IGRP dynamic route, specify an administrative distance greater than 100.
ip route vrf Supported Static Routes in an MPLS VPN Environment The following ip route vrf commands are supported when you configure static routes in an MPLS VPN environment, and the next hop and interface are in the same VRF: – ip route vrf vrf-name destination-prefix mask next-hop-address – ip route vrf vrf-name destination-prefix mask interface next-hop-address – ip route vrf vrf-name destination-prefix mask interface1 next-hop1 ip route vrf vrf-name destination-prefix mask interface2 next-hop2 The fo
ip route vrf Examples The following command shows how to reroute packets addressed to network 10.23.0.0 in VRF vpn3 to router 10.31.6.6: Router(config)# ip route vrf vpn3 10.23.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.31.6.6 Related Commands Command Description show ip route vrf Displays the IP routing table associated with a VRF.
ip rsvp msg-pacing ip rsvp msg-pacing To set up message pacing (that is, to control the transmission rate for Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) messages), use the ip rsvp msg-pacing command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp msg-pacing Examples In the following example, a router can send a maximum of 150 RSVP traffic engineering signaling messages in 1 second to a neighbor, and the size of the output queue is 750: Router(config)# ip rsvp msg-pacing period 1 burst 150 maxsize 750 Related Commands Command Description clear ip rsvp msg-pacing Clears the RSVP message pacing output from the show ip rsvp neighbor command.
ip rsvp signalling hello (configuration) ip rsvp signalling hello (configuration) To enable Hello globally on the router, use the ip rsvp signalling hello command in global configuration mode. To disable Hello globally on the router, use the no form of this command. ip rsvp signalling hello no ip rsvp signalling hello Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default None Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
ip rsvp signalling hello (interface) ip rsvp signalling hello (interface) To enable Hello on an interface where you need Fast Reroute protection, use the ip rsvp signalling hello command in interface configuration mode. To disable Hello on an interface where you need Fast Reroute protection, use the no form of this command ip rsvp signalling hello no ip rsvp signalling hello Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (configuration) ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (configuration) To enable the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol globally on the router for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) link and node protection, use the ip rsvp signalling hello bfd command in global configuration mode. To disable BFD globally on the router, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (interface) ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (interface) To enable the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol on an interface for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) link and node protection, use the ip rsvp signalling hello bfd command in interface configuration mode. To disable BFD on an interface for MPLS TE link and node protection, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp signalling hello dscp ip rsvp signalling hello dscp To set the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value that is in the IP header of a Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) traffic engineering (TE) hello message sent from an interface, use the ip rsvp signalling hello dscp command in interface configuration mode. To set the DSCP value to its default, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp signalling hello dscp In the following example, hello messages sent from this interface have a DSCP value of 30 and Fast Reroute capability is enabled by default: Router(config-if)# ip rsvp signalling hello dscp 30 Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp signalling hello Enables hellos on an interface where you need Fast Reroute protection. (interface) ip rsvp signalling hello Sets the hello refresh interval in hello messages.
ip rsvp signalling hello refresh interval ip rsvp signalling hello refresh interval To configure the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) traffic engineering (TE) hello refresh interval, use the ip rsvp signalling hello refresh interval command in interface configuration mode. To set the refresh interval to its default value, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp signalling hello refresh interval Examples In the following example, hello requests are sent to a neighbor every 5000 milliseconds and Fast Reroute capability is enabled by specifying the fast-reroute keyword: Router(config-if)# ip rsvp signalling hello fast-reroute refresh interval 5000 In the following example, hello requests are sent to a neighbor every 5000 milliseconds and Fast Reroute capability is enabled by default: Router(config-if)# ip rsvp signalling hello refresh interval 5000 Relate
ip rsvp signalling hello refresh misses ip rsvp signalling hello refresh misses To specify how many Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) traffic engineering (TE) hello acknowledgments a node can miss in a row before the node considers that communication with its neighbor is down, use the ip rsvp signalling hello refresh misses command in interface configuration mode. To return the missed refresh limit to its default value, use the no form of this command.
ip rsvp signalling hello refresh misses In the following example, if the node does not receive five hello acknowledgments in a row, the node declares that its neighbor is down and Fast Reroute is enabled by default: Router(config-if)# ip rsvp signalling hello refresh misses 5 Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp signalling hello Sets the DSCP value in hello messages. dscp ip rsvp signalling hello Sets the refresh interval in hello messages.
ip rsvp signalling hello statistics ip rsvp signalling hello statistics To enable Hello statistics on the router, use the ip rsvp signalling hello statistics command in global configuration mode. To disable Hello statistics on the router, use the no form of this command. ip rsvp signalling hello statistics no ip rsvp signalling hello statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
ip vrf ip vrf To define a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance and to enter VRF configuration mode, use the ip vrf command in global configuration mode. To remove a VRF instance, use the no form of this command. ip vrf vrf-name no ip vrf vrf-name Syntax Description vrf-name Command Default No VRFs are defined. No import or export lists are associated with a VRF. No route maps are associated with a VRF. Command Modes Global configuration (config) Command History Release Modification 12.
ip vrf Related Commands Command Description ip vrf forwarding (interface configuration) Associates a VRF with an interface or subinterface. rd Creates routing and forwarding tables for a VRF and specifies the default route distinguisher for a VPN.
ip vrf forwarding (interface configuration) ip vrf forwarding (interface configuration) To associate a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance with an interface or subinterface, use the ip vrf forwarding command in interface configuration mode. To disassociate a VRF, use the no form of this command. ip vrf forwarding vrf-name [downstream vrf-name2] no ip vrf forwarding vrf-name [downstream vrf-name2] Syntax Description vrf-name Associates the interface with the specified VRF.
ip vrf forwarding (interface configuration) – A Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) check is performed in the downstream VRFs.
ip vrf receive ip vrf receive To insert the IP address of an interface as a connected route entry in a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding instance (VRF) routing table, use the ip vrf receive command in interface configuration mode. To remove the connected entry from the VRF routing table, use the no form of this command.
ip vrf receive VRF Selection Based on Source IP Address Guidelines The ip vrf receive command is automatically disabled when the no ip vrf vrf-name command is entered for the local interface. An error message is displayed when the ip vrf receive command is disabled in this manner. Interfaces where the VRF Selection Based on Source IP Address feature is enabled can forward packets that have an IP address that corresponds to an IP address entry in the VRF table.
ip vrf receive Related Commands Command Description access-list (IP standard) Defines a standard IP access list. ip vrf Configures a VRF routing table. ip vrf select source Enables VRF selection on an interface. set vrf Enables VRF selection and filtering under a route map. vrf selection source Populates a single source IP address, or range of source IP addresses, to a VRF selection table.
ip vrf select source ip vrf select source To enable the VRF Selection feature on a particular interface or subinterface, use the ip vrf select source command in interface configuration mode. To disable the VRF Selection feature on a particular interface or subinterface, use the no form of this command. ip vrf select source no ip vrf select source Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values.
ip vrf select source Examples The following example shows how to enable the VRF Selection feature on an interface: Router(config-if)# ip vrf select source The following example shows the message you receive after you have deleted the VRF Selection feature on an interface: Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
ip vrf sitemap ip vrf sitemap To configure Site of Origin (SoO) filtering on an interface, use the ip vrf sitemap command in interface configuration mode. To disable SoO filtering on an interface, use the no form of this command. ip vrf sitemap route-map no ip vrf sitemap Syntax Description route-map Defaults No default behavior or values Command Modes Interface configuration Command History Release Modification 12.2(13)T This command was introduced. 12.
l2 vfi point-to-point l2 vfi point-to-point To establish a point-to-point Layer 2 virtual forwarding interface (VFI) between two separate networks, use the l2 vfi point-to-point command in global configuration mode. To disable the connection, use the no form of this command. l2 vfi name point-to-point no l2 vfi name point-to-point Syntax Description name Command Default Point-to-point Layer 2 virtual forwarding interfaces are not created.
list list To show all or part of the explicit path or paths, use the list command in IP explicit path configuration mode. list [starting-index-number] Syntax Description starting-index-number Defaults Explicit paths are not shown. Command Modes IP explicit path configuration Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.1(3)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.1(3)T. 12.0(10)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(10)ST.
list Related Commands Command Description append-after Inserts the new path entry after the specified index number. Commands might be renumbered as a result. index Inserts or modifies a path entry at a specific index. ip explicit-path Enters the command mode for IP explicit paths, and creates or modifies the specified path. next-address Specifies the next IP address in the explicit path. show ip explicit-paths Displays the configured IP explicit paths.
list (LSP Attributes) list (LSP Attributes) To display the contents of a label switched path (LSP) attribute list, use the list command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. list Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Contents of an LSP attribute list is not displayed. Command Modes LSP Attributes configuration (config-lsp-attr) Command History Release Modification 12.0(26)S This command was introduced. 12.
lockdown (LSP Attributes) lockdown (LSP Attributes) To disable reoptimization of the label switched path (LSP), use the lockdown command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To reenable reoptimization, use the no form of this command. lockdown no lockdown Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Reoptimization of the LSP is enabled. Command Modes LSP Attributes configuration (config-lsp-attr) Command History Release Modification 12.
lockdown (LSP Attributes) Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Creates or modifies an LSP attribute list. show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Displays global LSP attribute lists.
match mpls-label match mpls-label To redistribute routes that include Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) labels if the routes meet the conditions specified in the route map, use the match mpls-label command in route-map configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. match mpls-label no match mpls-label Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Routes with MPLS labels are not redistributed.
match mpls-label When you are passing routes through a route map, a route map can have several parts. Any route that does not match at least one match clause relating to a route-map command will be ignored; that is, the route will not be advertised for outbound route maps and will not be accepted for inbound route maps. If you want to modify only some data, you must configure a second route map section with an explicit match specified.
maximum routes maximum routes To limit the maximum number of routes in a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to prevent a provider edge (PE) router from importing too many routes, use the maximum routes command in VRF configuration mode or VRF address family configuration mode. To remove the limit on the maximum number of routes allowed, use the no form of this command.
maximum routes To limit the number of routes allowed in the VRF, use the maximum routes limit command with the warn-threshold argument. The warn-threshold argument generates a warning and does not allow the addition of routes to the VRF when the maximum number set by the limit argument is reached. The software generates a warning message every time a route is added to a VRF when the VRF route count is above the warning threshold.
maximum routes Command Description route-target Configures a VRF route target community for importing and exporting extended community attributes. snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn Enables the router to send MPLS VPN-specific SNMP notifications (traps and informs). vrf definition Configures a VRF routing table instance and enters VRF configuration mode.
metric-style narrow metric-style narrow To configure a router running Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) so that it generates and accepts old-style type, length, and value objects (TLVs), use the metric-style narrow command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
metric-style transition metric-style transition To configure a router running Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) so that it generates and accepts both old-style and new-style type, length, and value objects (TLVs), use the metric-style transition command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
metric-style wide metric-style wide To configure a router running Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) so that it generates and accepts only new-style type, length, and value objects (TLVs), use the metric-style wide command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
metric-style wide Related Commands Command Description metric-style narrow Configures a router to generate and accept old-style TLVs. metric-style transition Configures a router to generate and accept both old-style and new-style TLVs.
mls mpls mls mpls To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) recirculation, use the mls mpls command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS recirculation, use the no form of this command. mls mpls {recir-agg | tunnel-recir} no mls mpls {recir-agg | tunnel-recir} Syntax Description recir-agg Recirculates the MPLS aggregated-label packets (only new aggregated labels are impacted). tunnel-recir Recirculates the tunnel-MPLS packets. Defaults MPLS recirculation is disabled.
mls mpls (guaranteed bandwidth traffic engineering) mls mpls (guaranteed bandwidth traffic engineering) To configure the guaranteed bandwidth traffic engineering flow parameters globally, use the mls mpls command in global configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.
mls mpls (guaranteed bandwidth traffic engineering) If you do not enable tunnel-MPLS recirculation, the IPv4 and IPv4-tunneled packets that need to be labeled (for example, the packets that are encapsulated with an MPLS header) will be corrupted when they are transmitted from the Cisco 7600 series router. Use the show erm statistics command to display the Forwarding Information Base (FIB) Ternary Content Addressable Memory (TCAM) exception status for IPv4, IPv6, and MPLS protocols.
mls mpls (recirculation) mls mpls (recirculation) To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) recirculation, use the mls mpls command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS recirculation, use the no form of this command. mls mpls {recir-agg | tunnel-recir} no mls mpls {recir-agg | tunnel-recir} Syntax Description recir-agg Recirculates the MPLS aggregated-label packets (new aggregated labels are impacted only). tunnel-recir Recirculates the tunnel-MPLS packets.
mls mpls (recirculation) This example shows how to disable the tunnel-MPLS recirculation: Router(config)# no mls mpls tunnel-recir Router(config)# Related Commands Command Description show erm statistics Displays the FIB TCAM exception status for IPv4, IPv6, and MPLS protocols.
mpls atm control-vc mpls atm control-vc Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm control-vc command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To configure the control-VC virtual path identifier (VPI) and virtual circuit identifier (VCI) values for the initial link to the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) peer, use the mpls atm control-vc command in interface configuration mode. To unconfigure the values, use the no form of this command.
mpls atm control-vc Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference MP-148 January 2010
mpls atm cos mpls atm cos Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm cos command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To change the configured bandwidth allocation for class of service (CoS), use the mpls atm cos command in global configuration mode. mpls atm cos {available | standard | premium | control} weight Syntax Description available The weight for the available class. This is the lowest class priority. standard The weight for the standard class.
mpls atm disable-headend-vc mpls atm disable-headend-vc Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To remove all headend virtual circuits (VCs) from the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switch Controller (LSC) and disable its ability to function as an edge label switch router (LSR), use the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command in global configuration mode.
mpls atm multi-vc mpls atm multi-vc Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm multi-vc command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To configure a router subinterface to create one or more label virtual circuits (VCs) over which packets of different classes are sent, use the mpls atm multi-vc command in ATM subinterface submode. To remove the label virtual circuits, use the no form of this command.
mpls atm vpi mpls atm vpi Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm vpi command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To configure the range of values to use in the virtual path identifier (VPI) field for label virtual circuits (LVCs), use the mpls atm vpi command in interface configuration mode. To clear the range of values, use the no form of this command.
mpls atm vpi Use this command to select an alternate range of VPI values for ATM label assignment on this interface. The two ends of the link negotiate a range defined by the intersection of the range configured at each end. • To configure the VPI range for an edge label switch router (edge LSR) subinterface connected to another router or to an LSC, limit the range to four VPIs.
mpls atm vp-tunnel mpls atm vp-tunnel Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls atm vp-tunnel command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To specify an interface or a subinterface as a virtual path (VP) tunnel, use the mpls atm vp-tunnel command in interface configuration mode. To remove the VP tunnel from an interface or subinterface, use the no form of this command.
mpls atm vp-tunnel The following example shows how to create a VP tunnel with a value of 240 and a VCI range of 33 to 4090: Router(config-if)# mpls atm vp-tunnel 240 vci-range 33-4090 Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference January 2010 MP-155
mpls bgp forwarding mpls bgp forwarding To enable an interface to receive Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) packets when the signaling of MPLS labels is through the use of the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), use the mpls bgp forwarding command in interface configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command. mpls bgp forwarding no mpls bgp forwarding Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default MPLS forwarding by BGP is not enabled.
mpls control-word mpls control-word To enable the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) control word in an Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) static pseudowire connection, use the mpls control-word command in xconnect configuration mode. To disable the control word, use the no form of this command. mpls control-word no mpls control-word Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default The control word is included in connections.
mpls control-word Router(config-if-xconn)# no mpls control-word Router(config-if-xconn)# exit Router(config-if)# exit Related Commands Command Description mpls label Configures an AToM static pseudowire connection by defining local and remote pseudowire labels. mpls label range Configures the range of local labels available for use on packet interfaces.
mpls cos-map mpls cos-map Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls cos-map command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To create a class map that specifies how classes map to label virtual circuits (VCs) when they are combined with a prefix map, use the mpls cos-map command in global configuration mode. mpls cos-map cos-map Syntax Description cos-map Defaults No class maps are specified. Command Modes Global configuration (config) Command History Release Modification 12.
mpls experimental mpls experimental To configure Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) experimental (EXP) levels for a virtual circuit (VC) class that can be assigned to a VC bundle and thus applied to all VC members of that bundle, use the mpls experimental command in VC-class configuration mode. To remove the MPLS EXP levels from the VC class, use the no form of this command. To configure the MPLS EXP levels for a VC member of a bundle, use the mpls experimental command in bundle-vc configuration mode.
mpls experimental To use this command to configure an individual bundle member in bundle-VC configuration mode, first enter the bundle command to enact bundle configuration mode for the bundle to which you want to add or modify the VC member to be configured. Then use the pvc-bundle command to specify the VC to be created or modified and enter bundle-VC configuration mode.
mpls export interval mpls export interval To configure the collection and export of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Prefix/Application/Label (PAL) information to a NetFlow collector, use the mpls export interval command in global configuration mode. To disable the collecting and exporting of the MPLS PAL information, use the no form of this command.
mpls export interval Examples The following example shows how to configure a time interval of 720 minutes (12 hours) between exports of the entire MPLS PAL table to a NetFlow collector: configure terminal mpls export interval 720 exit Related Commands Command Description mpls export vpnv4 prefixes Configures the tracking and export of VPNv4 label information from the MPLS PAL table to a NetFlow collector. show mpls flow mappings Displays all entries in the MPLS PAL table.
mpls export vpnv4 prefixes mpls export vpnv4 prefixes To configure the tracking and export of Virtual Private Network (VPN) IPv4 (VPNv4) label information from the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Prefix/Application/Label (PAL) table to a NetFlow collector, use the mpls export vpnv4 prefixes command in global configuration mode. To disable the tracking and exporting of VPNv4 label information, use the no form of this command.
mpls export vpnv4 prefixes Related Commands Command Description mpls export interval Configures the collection and export of MPLS PAL information to a NetFlow collector. show mpls flow mappings Displays all entries in the MPLS PAL table.
mpls forwarding bgp mpls forwarding bgp To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) nonstop forwarding on an interface that uses Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) as the label distribution protocol, use the mpls forwarding bgp command in interface configuration mode. To disable MPLS nonstop forwarding on the interface, use the no form of this command. mpls forwarding bgp no mpls forwarding bgp Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls forwarding bgp Cisco 10000 Series Example Router(config)# interface Pos1/0/0 Router(config-if)# mpls forwarding bgp Related Commands Command Description bgp graceful-restart Enables BGP Graceful Restart on the router.
mpls ip (global configuration) mpls ip (global configuration) To enable Muliprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths for the platform, use the mpls ip command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ip no mpls ip Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Label switching of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths is enabled for the platform.
mpls ip (global configuration) Usage Guidelines MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths (sometimes called dynamic label switching) is enabled by this command. For a given interface to perform dynamic label switching, this switching function must be enabled for the interface and for the platform.
mpls ip (interface configuration) mpls ip (interface configuration) To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths for a particular interface, use the mpls ip command in interface configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command. mpls ip no mpls ip Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths for the interface is disabled.
mpls ip (interface configuration) Usage Guidelines MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally routed paths is sometimes called dynamic label switching. If dynamic label switching has been enabled for the platform when this command is issued on an interface, label distribution for the interface begins with the periodic transmission of neighbor discovery Hello messages on the interface.
mpls ip default-route mpls ip default-route To enable the distribution of labels associated with the IP default route, use the mpls ip default-route command in global configuration mode. mpls ip default-route Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No distribution of labels for the IP default route. Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 11.1CT This command was introduced. 12.
mpls ip encapsulate explicit-null mpls ip encapsulate explicit-null To encapsulate all packets forwarded from the interface or subinterface with an explicit NULL label header, use the mpls ip encapsulate explicit-null command in interface configuration or subinterface configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. mpls ip encapsulate explicit-null no mpls ip encapsulate explicit-null Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls ip propagate-ttl mpls ip propagate-ttl To control the generation of the time-to-live (TTL) field in the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) header when labels are first added to an IP packet, use the mpls ip propagate-ttl command in global configuration mode. To use a fixed TTL value (255) for the first label of the IP packet, use the no form of this command.
mpls ip propagate-ttl Examples The following example shows how to disable the TTL field in the MPLS header for only forwarded packets: Router(config)# no mpls ip propagate-ttl forwarded Related Commands Command Description traceroute Displays the routes that packets take through a network to their destinations.
mpls ip ttl-expiration pop mpls ip ttl-expiration pop To specify how a packet with an expired time-to-live (TTL) value is forwarded, use the mpls ip ttl-expiration pop command in global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. mpls ip ttl-expiration pop labels no mpls ip ttl-expiration pop labels Syntax Description labels Defaults The packets are forwarded by the original label stack.
mpls ip ttl-expiration pop If packets have a single label, that label is usually a global address or terminal VPN label. Those packets can be forwarded through the use of the global IP routing table. Packets that have more than one label can be forwarded through the use of the original label stack. Enter the mpls ip ttl-expiration pop 1 command to enable forwarding based on more than one label. (This is the most common application of the command.
mpls ipv6 source-interface mpls ipv6 source-interface Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)S, the mpls ipv6 source-interface command is not available in Cisco IOS 12.2S releases. Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(15)T, the mpls ipv6 source-interface command is not available in Cisco IOS 12.4T releases.
mpls ipv6 source-interface Examples The following example shows loopback interface 0 being configured as a source address for locally generated IPv6 packets: interface Loopback0 ip address 192.168.99.5 255.255.255.255 ipv6 address 2001:0DB8::1/32 ! mpls ipv6 source-interface loopback0 Related Commands Command Description neighbor send-label Advertises the capability of the router to send MPLS labels with BGP routes.
mpls l2transport route mpls l2transport route To enable routing of Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) packets over a specified virtual circuit (VC), use the mpls l2transport route command in the appropriate command mode. To delete the VC, use the no form of this command on both provider edge (PE) routers. mpls l2transport route destination vc-id no mpls l2transport route destination vc-id Syntax Description destination Specifies the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) IP address of the remote PE router.
mpls l2transport route Usage Guidelines A Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) VC runs across an MPLS cloud to connect interfaces on two PE routers. Use this command on each PE router to route packets across the MPLS cloud to the interface of the other PE router. Specify the LDP IP address of the other PE router for the destination parameter. Do not specify the IP address of the router from which you are issuing the command. You can choose any number for the VC ID.
mpls l2transport route ATM Cell Relay over MPLS Example At PE1, you issue the following commands: PE1_Router(config)# interface atm5/0.100 PE1_Router(config-if)# pvc 1/200 l2transport PE1_Router(config-atm-vc)# encapsulation aal0 PE1_Router(config-atm-vc)# mpls l2transport route 192.168.0.1 50 At PE2, you issue the following commands: PE2_Router(config)# interface atm5/0.
mpls l2transport route At PE2, you issue the following commands: PE2_Router(config)# interface Serial1/0 PE2_Router(config-if)# encapsulation ppp PE2_Router(config-if)# mpls l2transport route 172.16.0.1 50 Related Commands Command Description show mpls l2transport vc Displays information about AToM VCs that have been enabled to route Layer 2 packets on a router.
mpls label mpls label To configure an Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) static pseudowire connection by defining local and remote circuit labels, use the mpls label command in xconnect configuration mode. To remove the local and remote pseudowire labels, use the no form of this command. mpls label local-pseudowire-label remote-pseudowire-label no mpls label Syntax Description local-pseudowire-label An unused static label that is within the range defined by the mpls label range command.
mpls label Related Commands Command Description mpls control-word Enables sending the MPLS control word in an AToM static pseudowire connection. mpls label range Configures the range of local labels available for use on packet interfaces. show mpls l2transport vc Displays information about AToM VCs and AToM static pseudowires that have been enabled to route Layer 2 packets on a router. xconnect Binds an attachment circuit to a pseudowire, and configures an AToM static pseudowire.
mpls label mode mpls label mode To configure the Per VRF Labels, use the mpls label mode command in global configuration mode. To disable the Per VRF Label feature, use the no form of this command. mpls label mode {vrf vrf-name | all-vrfs} protocol bgp-vpnv4 {per-prefix | per-vrf} no mpls label mode {vrf vrf-name | all-vrfs} protocol bgp-vpnv4 {per-prefix | per-vrf} Syntax Description vrf Configures a single VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) domain.
mpls label mode (6VPE) mpls label mode (6VPE) To configure the MPLS VPN 6VPE per VRF Label feature, use the mpls label mode command in global configuration mode. To disable the MPLS VPN 6VPE per VRF Label feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls label mode (6VPE) Router(config)# mpls label mode all-vrfs protocol bgp-vpnv6 per-vrf Related Commands Command Description debug ip bgp vpnv6 unicast Displays debugging messages for VPNv6 unicast routes. show vrf detail Displays the assigned label mode for the VRF.
mpls label protocol (global configuration) mpls label protocol (global configuration) To specify the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) for a platform, use the mpls label protocol command in global configuration mode. To restore the default LDP, use the no form of this command. mpls label protocol {ldp | tdp} no mpls label protocol Syntax Description ldp Specifies that LDP is the default label distribution protocol.
mpls label protocol (global configuration) Note Examples Use caution when upgrading the image on a router that uses TDP. Ensure that the TDP sessions are established when the new image is loaded. You can accomplish this by issuing the global configuration command mpls label protocol tdp. Issue this command and save it to the startup configuration before loading the new image. Alternatively, you can enter the command and save the running configuration immediately after loading the new image.
mpls label protocol (interface configuration) mpls label protocol (interface configuration) To specify the label distribution protocol for an interface, use the mpls label protocol command in interface configuration mode. To remove the label distribution protocol from the interface, use the no form of this command. mpls label protocol {ldp | tdp | both} no mpls label protocol Syntax Description ldp Specifies that the label distribution protocol (LDP) is to be used on the interface.
mpls label protocol (interface configuration) Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(33)SCA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SCA. To successfully establish a session for label distribution for a link connecting two label switch routers (LSRs), the link interfaces on the LSRs must be configured to use the same label distribution protocol.
mpls label range mpls label range To configure the range of local labels available for use with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) applications on packet interfaces, use the mpls label range command in global configuration mode. To revert to the platform defaults, use the no form of this command. mpls label range minimum-value maximum-value [static minimum-static-value maximum-static-value] no mpls label range Syntax Description minimum-value The value of the smallest label allowed in the label space.
mpls label range Usage Guidelines The labels 0 through 15 are reserved by the IETF (see RFC 3032, MPLS Label Stack Encoding, for details) and cannot be included in the range specified in the mpls label range command. If you enter a 0 in the command, you will get a message that indicates that the command is an unrecognized command.
mpls label range <16-999> Lower Minimum static label value In this example, the range available for static label assignment is from 16 to 999. If you configure the dynamic label space with the default minimum (16) and maximum (1048575) values, no space remains for static label assignment, help lines are not displayed, and you cannot configure static label bindings.
mpls ldp address-message mpls ldp address-message To specify advertisement of platform addresses to an LC-ATM label distribution protocol (LDP) peer, use the mpls ldp address-message command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp address-message no mpls ldp address-message Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults LDP Address and Address Withdraw messages are not sent to LC-ATM LDP peers.
mpls ldp address-message The ability to map between the IP address and the peer LDP identifier is required so that: • When the Multiprotocol Label Swithcing (MPLS) forwarding engine (the Label Forwarding Information Base [LFIB]) asks for labels for a given destination prefix and next hop address, the LSR can find the label learned (if any) from the next hop. The LSR maintains learned labels in its label information base (LIB) tagged by the LDP ID of the advertising LSR.
mpls ldp advertise-labels mpls ldp advertise-labels To control the distribution of locally assigned (incoming) labels by means of label distribution protocol (LDP), use the mpls ldp advertise-labels command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp advertise-labels Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(23)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(23)S. 12.2(14)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)S. 12.2(13)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(13)T. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB and implemented on the Cisco 10000-PRE2 router. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
mpls ldp advertise-labels Normally, LDP advertises labels only for IP prefixes that are in the routing table. You can use the mpls ldp advertise-labels interface command to force LDP to advertise a label for a prefix constructed from an interface address and a 32-bit mask. Such a prefix is not usually in the routing table.
mpls ldp advertise-labels in label: imp-null Advertised to: 10.200.110.55:0 out label: 16 lsr: 10.200.110.55:0 out label: 19 lsr: 10.150.25.25:0 Advert acl(s): Prefix acl pfx-filter1, Peer acl lsr-filter1 10.0.0.33/32, rev 98 out label: imp-null lsr: 10.150.25.25:0 10.0.0.44/32, rev 99 in label: imp-null Advertised to: 10.200.110.55:0 10.150.25.25:0 10.150.25.25/32, rev 101 in label: 20 Advertised to: 10.200.110.55:0 10.150.25.25:0 out label: 19 lsr: 10.200.110.55:0 out label: imp-null lsr: 10.150.25.
mpls ldp advertise-labels old-style mpls ldp advertise-labels old-style To cause the for prefix-access-list parameter of the mpls ldp advertise-labels command to be interpreted according to the method used in earlier Cisco IOS software versions, use the mpls ldp advertise-labels old-style command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp advertise-labels old-style Usage Guidelines The method for interpreting the for prefix-access-list parameter in the mpls ldp advertise-labels command is defined by Rule 2.a in the “Usage Guidelines” section in the mpls ldp advertise-labels command. This Rule 2.a follows normal access list conventions. However, earlier Cisco IOS software versions used a different method for interpreting the for prefix-access-list parameter in mpls ldp advertise-labels command.
mpls ldp atm control-mode mpls ldp atm control-mode Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls ldp atm control-mode command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To control the mode used for handling label binding requests on LC-ATM interfaces, use the mpls ldp atm control-mode command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp atm control-mode Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB and implemented on the Cisco 10000-PRE2 router. 12.4(20)T This command was removed. Use of ordered control mode by an ATM device acting as a transit LSR in an ATM cloud ensures that the device will receive labeled packets to forward only after it has learned the outgoing labels required by MPLS to forward the packets.
mpls ldp atm vc-merge mpls ldp atm vc-merge Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls ldp atm vc-merge command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To control whether the vc-merge (multipoint-to-point) capability is supported for unicast label virtual circuits (LVCs), use the mpls ldp atm vc-merge command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp atm vc-merge Usage Guidelines Use of VC merge helps conserve ATM labels by allowing incoming LSPs from different sources for the same destination to be merged onto a single outgoing VC. Examples In the following example, the ATM-VC merge capability is disabled: Router# no mpls ldp atm vc-merge Related Commands Command Description show mpls atm-ldp capability Displays the ATM MPLS capabilities negotiated with LDP neighbors for LC-ATM interfaces.
mpls ldp autoconfig mpls ldp autoconfig To enable Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) on interfaces for which an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) instance or Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) instance has been defined, use the mpls ldp autoconfig command in router configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp autoconfig Usage Guidelines Examples • You can specify this command multiple times to enable LDP on different routing areas with interfaces running OSPF. • If LDP is disabled globally, the mpls ldp autoconfig command fails. LDP must be enabled globally by means of the global mpls ip command first. • If the mpls ldp autoconfig command is configured, you cannot issue the global no mpls ip command. If you want to disable LDP, you must issue the no mpls ldp autoconfig command first.
mpls ldp backoff mpls ldp backoff To configure parameters for the label distribution protocol (LDP) backoff mechanism, use the mpls ldp backoff command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp backoff initial-backoff maximum-backoff no mpls ldp backoff initial-backoff maximum-backoff Syntax Description initial-backoff Number from 5 to 2147483, inclusive, that defines the initial backoff value in seconds. The default is 15 seconds.
mpls ldp backoff Usage Guidelines The LDP backoff mechanism prevents two incompatibly configured label switch routers (LSRs) from engaging in an unthrottled sequence of session setup failures. For example, an incompatibility arises when two neighboring routers attempt to perform LC-ATM (label-controlled ATM) but the two are using different ranges of VPI/VCI values for labels.
mpls ldp discovery mpls ldp discovery To configure the interval between transmission of consecutive Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) discovery hello messages, or the hold time for a discovered LDP neighbor, or the neighbors from which requests for targeted hello messages may be honored, use the mpls ldp discovery command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp discovery Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(14)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(14)ST. 12.1(2)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.1(2)T. 12.1(8a)E This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.1(8a)E. 12.2(2)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(2)T. 12.2(4)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(4)T. 12.2(8)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(8)T. 12.
mpls ldp discovery Note Examples Normally, active transmission of targeted hello messages on a router is triggered by some configuration action, such as an mpls ip command on a traffic engineering tunnel interface.
mpls ldp discovery transport-address mpls ldp discovery transport-address To specify the transport address advertised in the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) discovery hello messages sent on an interface, use the mpls ldp discovery transport-address command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp discovery transport-address Usage Guidelines The establishment of an LDP session between two routers requires a session TCP connection by which label advertisements can be exchanged between the routers. To establish the session TCP connection, each router must know the transport address (IP address) of the other router. The LDP discovery mechanism provides the means for a router to advertise the transport address for its end-of-session TCP connection.
mpls ldp explicit-null mpls ldp explicit-null To cause a router to advertise an Explicit Null label in situations where it would normally advertise an Implicit Null label, use the mpls ldp explicit-null command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp explicit-null Usage Guidelines Normally, LDP advertises an Implicit Null label for directly connected routes. The Implicit Null label causes the previous hop (penultimate) router to do penultimate hop popping. Situations exist where it might be desirable to prevent the penultimate router from performing penultimate hop popping and to force it to replace the incoming label with the Explicit Null label.
mpls ldp graceful-restart mpls ldp graceful-restart To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Graceful Restart, use the mpls ldp graceful-restart command in global configuration mode. To disable LDP Graceful Restart, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp graceful-restart no mpls ldp graceful-restart Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default LDP Graceful Restart is not enabled.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers forwarding-holding mpls ldp graceful-restart timers forwarding-holding To specify the amount of time the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwarding state should be preserved after the control plane restarts, use the mpls ldp graceful-restart timers forwarding-holding command in global configuration mode. To revert to the default timer value, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers forwarding-holding Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp graceful-restart timers max-recovery Specifies the amount of time a router should hold stale label-FEC bindings after an LDP session has been reestablished. mpls ldp graceful-restart timers neighbor-liveness Specifies the amount of time a router should wait for an LDP session to be reestablished.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers max-recovery mpls ldp graceful-restart timers max-recovery To specify the amount of time a router should hold stale label-Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) bindings after a Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) session has been reestablished, use the mpls ldp graceful-restart timers max-recovery command in global configuration mode. To revert to the default timer value, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers max-recovery Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp Specifies the amount of time the MPLS forwarding state should be preserved graceful-restart timers after the control plane restarts. forwarding-holding Specifies the amount of time a router should wait for an LDP session to be mpls ldp graceful-restart timers reestablished.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers neighbor-liveness mpls ldp graceful-restart timers neighbor-liveness To specify the upper bound on the amount of time a router should wait for a Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) session to be reestablished, use the mpls ldp graceful-restart timers neighbor-liveness command in global configuration mode. To revert to the default timer value, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp graceful-restart timers neighbor-liveness Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp Specifies the amount of time the MPLS forwarding state should be preserved graceful-restart timers after the control plane restarts. forwarding-holding Specifies the amount of time a router should hold stale label-FEC bindings mpls ldp graceful-restart timers after an LDP session has been reestablished.
mpls ldp holdtime mpls ldp holdtime To change the time for which an Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) session is maintained in the absence of LDP messages from the session peer, use the mpls ldp holdtime command in global configuration mode. To disable this command, use the no form of the command. mpls ldp holdtime seconds no mpls ldp holdtime seconds Syntax Description seconds Defaults The default value for the seconds argument is 180.
mpls ldp holdtime Examples The following example shows how to configure the hold time of LDP sessions for 30 seconds: Router# mpls ldp holdtime 30 Related Commands Command Description show mpls ldp parameters Displays the current LDP parameter. show mpls atm-ldp bindings Displays specified entries from the ATM label binding database.
mpls ldp igp autoconfig mpls ldp igp autoconfig To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) autoconfiguration on an interface that belongs to an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area, use the mpls ldp igp autoconfig command in interface configuration mode. To disable MPLS LDP autoconfiguration, use the no form of the command. mpls ldp igp autoconfig no mpls ldp igp autoconfig Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls ldp igp sync mpls ldp igp sync To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)-Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) synchronization on an interface that belongs to an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) process, use the mpls ldp igp sync command in interface configuration mode. To disable MPLS LDP-IGP synchronization, use the no form of the command.
mpls ldp igp sync If you configure a new delay time while a timer is running, LDP saves the new delay time but does not reconfigure the running timer.
mpls ldp igp sync holddown mpls ldp igp sync holddown To specify how long an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) should wait for Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) synchronization to be achieved, use the mpls ldp igp sync holddown command in global configuration mode. To disable the hold-down timer, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp label mpls ldp label To enter MPLS LDP label configuration mode to specify how Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) handles local label allocation, use the mpls ldp label command in global configuration mode. To remove all local label allocation filters configured in MPLS LDP label configuration mode and restore LDP default behavior for local label allocation without a session reset, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp label Related Commands Command Description allocate Configures local label allocation filters for learned routes for MPLS LDP.
mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes To generate system error logging (syslog) messages when Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions go down, use the mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes command in global configuration mode. To disable generating syslog messages, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes no mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Logging is enabled by default.
mpls ldp logging neighbor-changes The following output shows the log entries when an LDP session with neighbor 192.168.1.100:0 goes down and comes up. The session went down because the discovery hold timer expired. The VRF table identifier for the neighbor is 1. 2d00h: %LDP-5-NBRCHG: LDP Neighbor 192.168.1.100:0 (1) is DOWN (Disc hold timer expired) 2d00h: %LDP-5-NBRCHG: LDP Neighbor 192.168.1.
mpls ldp logging password configuration mpls ldp logging password configuration To enable the display password configuration change events on an MPLS Label Switch Router (LSR), use the mpls ldp logging password configuration command in global configuration mode. To disable the display of password events, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp logging password configuration [rate-limit num] no mpls ldp logging password configuration Syntax Description rate-limit num Defaults Logging is disabled.
mpls ldp logging password configuration Command Description show mpls ldp neighbor password Displays password information used in established LDP sessions. show running-config Displays the contents of the currently running configuration file or the configuration for a specific class map, interface, map class, policy map, or VC class.
mpls ldp logging password rollover mpls ldp logging password rollover To enable the display password rollover events on an MPLS Label Switch Router (LSR), use the mpls ldp logging password rollover command in global configuration mode. To disable the display of password events, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp logging password rollover [rate-limit num] no mpls ldp logging password rollover Syntax Description rate-limit num Defaults Logging is disabled.
mpls ldp logging password rollover Command Description show mpls ldp neighbor password Displays password information used in established LDP sessions. show running-config Displays the contents of the currently running configuration file or the configuration for a specific class map, interface, map class, policy map, or VC class.
mpls ldp loop-detection mpls ldp loop-detection To enable the label distribution protocol (LDP) optional loop detection mechanism, use the mpls ldp loop-detection command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp loop-detection no mpls ldp loop-detection Syntax Description This command has no optional keywords or arguments. Defaults LDP loop detection is disabled. Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
mpls ldp maxhops mpls ldp maxhops To limit the number of hops permitted in a label switched path (LSP) established by the Downstream on Demand method of label distribution, use the mpls ldp maxhops command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp maxhops number no mpls ldp maxhops Syntax Description number Defaults The default is 254 hops. Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 11.
mpls ldp maxhops Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp router-id Specifies a preferred interface for determining the LDP router ID. show mpls atm-ldp bindings Displays specified entries from the ATM label binding database. show mpls ip binding Displays specified information about label bindings learned by LDP.
mpls ldp neighbor implicit-withdraw mpls ldp neighbor implicit-withdraw To configure the advertisement of a new label for a Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) without the withdrawal of the previously advertised label, use the mpls ldp neighbor implicit-withdraw command in global configuration mode. To disable this option for the specified neighbor, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp neighbor implicit-withdraw Usage Guidelines By default, in Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)ST and later, LDP withdraws the previously advertised label by using a withdraw message before advertising a new label for a FEC. In Cisco IOS releases prior to 12.0(21)ST, LDP did not withdraw a previously advertised label before advertising a new label for a FEC. In those older releases, the new label advertisement served as an implied withdraw and LDP did not send a withdraw message.
mpls ldp neighbor labels accept mpls ldp neighbor labels accept To configure a label switching router (LSR) to filter label distribution protocol (LDP) inbound label bindings from a particular LDP peer, use the mpls ldp neighbor labels accept command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp neighbor labels accept A router does not maintain a record of the set of bindings it previously discarded. Therefore, it cannot ask its neighbors to readvertise just those bindings. In addition, LDP (as defined by RFC 3036) does not provide a means for a router to signal its neighbors to readvertise all label bindings. Consequently, to relearn label bindings following such configuration changes, you must reset the LDP session or sessions by using the clear mpls ldp neighbor command.
mpls ldp neighbor password mpls ldp neighbor password To configure a password for computing message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) checksums for the session TCP connection with the specified neighbor, use the mpls ldp neighbor password command in global configuration mode. To disable this option for the specified neighbor, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp neighbor password Usage Guidelines You can invoke authentication between two LDP peers, verifying each segment sent on the TCP connection between the peers. To do so, you must configure authentication on both LDP peers using the same password; otherwise, the peer session is not established. The authentication capability uses the MD5 algorithm.
mpls ldp neighbor targeted mpls ldp neighbor targeted To set up a targeted session with a specified neighbor, use the mpls ldp neighbor targeted command in global configuration mode. To disable a targeted session, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vpn-name] ip-addr targeted [ldp | tdp] no mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vpn-name] ip-addr [targeted [ldp | tdp]] Syntax Description vrf vpn-name (Optional) VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance for a specified neighbor.
mpls ldp neighbor targeted The mpls ldp neighbor targeted command can improve label convergence time for directly connected neighbor LSRs when the links directly connecting them are down. When the links between the neighbor LSRs are up, both the link and targeted Hellos maintain the LDP session. If the links between the neighbor LSRs go down, the targeted Hellos maintain the session, allowing the LSRs to retain labels learned from each other.
mpls ldp password fallback mpls ldp password fallback To configure a message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) password for Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions with peers, use the mpls ldp password fallback command in global configuration mode. To remove the MD5 password, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp password fallback • If the service password-encryption command is enabled, then the type 0 password is converted and saved in encrypted form. • If the service password-encryption command is disabled, then the type 0 password is saved in clear-text (nonencrypted) form. When you enter a show running-config command, if the global service password-encryption command is enabled, a password saved in clear-text form is converted into encrypted form, and displayed and saved in encrypted form.
mpls ldp password option mpls ldp password option To configure a Message Digest 5 (MD5) password for Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions with neighbors whose LDP router IDs are permitted by a specified access list, use the mpls ldp password option command in global configuration mode. To disable an MD5 password for LDP sessions with neighbors whose LDP router IDs are permitted by a specified access list, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp password option Usage Guidelines This command specifies the password argument as the MD5 password for LDP sessions with neighbors whose LDP router IDs are permitted by an access list specified in the acl argument. This password is used if a password is not specified by the mpls ldp neighbor password command. When a configuration includes multiple mpls ldp password option commands, the number argument defines the order in which the command access lists are evaluated.
mpls ldp password required mpls ldp password required To specify that Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) must use a password for an attempt to establish a session between LDP peers, use the mpls ldp password required command in global configuration mode. To remove the requirement that a password be used for a session with LDP, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp password required Router(config)# mpls ldp password required Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp neighbor password Configures a password key for computing MD5 checksums for the session TCP connection with the specified neighbor. mpls ldp password fallback Configures an MD5 password for LDP sessions with peers. mpls ldp password option Configures an MD5 password for LDP sessions with neighbors whose LDP router IDs are permitted by a specified access list.
mpls ldp password rollover duration mpls ldp password rollover duration To configure the duration before the new password takes effect on an MPLS label switch router (LSR), use the mpls ldp password rollover duration command in global configuration mode. To disable duration of a password rollover, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp password rollover duration Command Description mpls ldp password required Specifies that LDP must use a password when establishing a session between LDP peers. service password-encryption Encrypts passwords. show mpls ldp discovery Displays the status of the LDP discovery process. show mpls ldp neighbor Displays the status of LDP sessions. show mpls ldp neighbor password Displays password information used in established LDP sessions.
mpls ldp path-vector maxlength mpls ldp path-vector maxlength To set the maximum number of router IDs permitted in a path vector type, length, value (TLV) used to perform path vector loop detection, use the mpls ldp path-vector maxlength command in global configuration mode. To return the path vector maximum length to the default behavior, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp path-vector maxlength Like the maximum hop count, the path vector limit threshold is used to prevent forwarding loops in the setting up of label switch path (LSPs) across an ATM region. If you configured the mpls ldp loop-detection command for ATM LSRs that are sending and receiving Label Request and Label Map messages, you might want to inhibit the use of the path vector for loop detection (mpls ldp path-vector maxlength 0 command).
mpls ldp path-vector maxlength Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp loop-detection Enables the LDP optional loop detection mechanism. mpls ldp maxhops Limits the number of hops permitted in an LSP established by the Downstream on Demand method of label distribution. mpls ldp router-id Specifies a preferred interface for determining the LDP router ID. show mpls ldp neighbors Displays the status of LDP sessions. show mpls ldp parameters Displays current LDP parameters.
mpls ldp router-id mpls ldp router-id To specify a preferred interface for the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) router ID, use the mpls ldp router-id command in global configuration mode. To disable the interface from being used as the LDP router ID, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp router-id Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(33)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SB. 12.2(33)SXI This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXI. 12.2(33)SCC This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SCC. The mpls ldp router-id command allows you to use the IP address of an interface as the LDP router ID. The following steps describe the normal process for determining the LDP router ID: 1.
mpls ldp router-id • Examples If you delete a VRF that you configured, the mpls ldp router-id command for the deleted VRF is removed. The default VRF cannot be deleted. The following example shows that the POS2/0/0 interface has been specified as the preferred interface for the LDP router ID. The IP address of that interface is used as the LDP router ID.
mpls ldp session protection mpls ldp session protection To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) autoconfiguration for existing LDP sessions or when new sessions are established, use the mpls ldp session protection command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ldp session protection If you issue the mpls ldp session protection command without the duration keyword, then session protection is enabled for 86400 seconds (24 hours) meaning that the LDP Targeted Hello Adjacency is retained for 24 hours after a link is lost. This is the default timeout. If you issue the mpls ldp session protection duration infinite command, then session protection is enabled forever meaning that the LDP Targeted Hello Adjacency is retained forever after a link is lost.
mpls ldp sync mpls ldp sync To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)-Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) synchronization on interfaces for an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) process or an Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) process, use the mpls ldp sync command in router configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp sync no mpls ldp sync Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls ldp sync Command Description show isis mpls ldp Displays synchronization and autoconfiguration information about interfaces belonging to IS-IS processes. show mpls ldp igp sync Displays the status of the MPLS LDP-IGP synchronization process.
mpls ldp tcp pak-priority mpls ldp tcp pak-priority To give high priority to Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) messages sent by a router locally using Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connections, use the mpls ldp tcp pak-priority command in global configuration mode. To keep LDP messages at normal priority, use the no form of this command. mpls ldp tcp pak-priority no mpls ldp tcp pak-priority Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults This command is disabled.
mpls ldp tcp pak-priority Command Description match ip precedence Identifies IP precedence values as match criteria. match mpls experimental Configures a class map to use the specified value of the EXP field as a match criterion. policy-map Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify a service policy.
mpls load-balance per-label mpls load-balance per-label To enable the load balancing for the tag-to-tag traffic, use the mpls load-balance per-label command in global configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command. mpls load-balance per-label no mpls load-balance per-label Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Disabled Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
mpls mtu mpls mtu To set the per-interface Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) maximum transmission unit (MTU) for labeled packets, use the mpls mtu command in interface configuration mode. To restore the default, use the no form of this command. mpls mtu [override] bytes no mpls mtu Syntax Description override (Optional) Allows you to set the MPLS MTU value higher than the interface MTU value on interfaces (such as Ethernet) that have a default interface MTU value of 1580 or less.
mpls mtu Usage Guidelines Caution Usage Guidelines for Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)S Although you can set the MPLS MTU to a value greater than the interface MTU, set the MPLS MTU less than or equal to the interface MTU to prevent data corruption, dropped packets, and high CPU conditions. A best practice is to set the interface MTU of the core-facing interface to a value greater than either the IP MTU or interface MTU of the edge-facing interface.
mpls mtu Caution If you do not set the MPLS MTU less than or equal to the interface MTU, data corruption, dropped packets, and high CPU conditions can occur. • Changing the interface MTU can also modify the IP MTU, Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) MTU, and other MTU values, if they depend on the value of the interface MTU. The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol requires that the IP MTU values match on both ends of the link.
mpls mtu The following example shows how to set the maximum labeled packet size for the FastEthernet interface to 1508, which is common in an MPLS core carrying MPLS Virtual Private Network (VPN) traffic: interface Fastethernet0 mpls mtu override 1508 Related Commands Command Description mtu Sets the MTU size for the interface.
mpls netflow egress mpls netflow egress To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) egress NetFlow accounting on an interface, use the mpls netflow egress command in interface configuration mode. To disable MPLS egress NetFlow accounting, use the no form of this command. mpls netflow egress no mpls netflow egress Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default This command is disabled.
mpls oam mpls oam To enter MPLS OAM configuration mode for customizing the default behavior of echo packets, use the mpls oam command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS OAM functionality, use the no format of this command. mpls oam no mpls oam Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Customizing the default behavior of echo packets is disabled. Command Modes Global configuration (config) Command History Release Modification 12.
mpls prefix-map mpls prefix-map Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls prefix-map command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To configure a router to use a specified quality of service (QoS) map when a label destination prefix matches the specified access list, use the mpls prefix-map command in ATM subinterface submode. mpls prefix-map prefix-map access-list access-list cos-map cos-map Syntax Description prefix-map Unique number for a prefix map.
mpls request-labels for mpls request-labels for Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls request-labels for command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To restrict the creation of label switched paths (LSPs) through the use of access lists on the label switch controller (LSC) or label edge router (LER), use the mpls request-labels for command in global configuration mode.
mpls request-labels for Related Commands Command Description access list Creates access lists. ip access-list Permits or denies access to IP addresses.
mpls static binding ipv4 mpls static binding ipv4 To bind a prefix to a local or remote label, use the mpls static binding ipv4 command in global configuration mode. To remove the binding between the prefix and label, use the no form of this command.
mpls static binding ipv4 The mpls static binding ipv4 command installs the specified bindings into the LDP Label Information Base (LIB). LDP will install the binding labels for forwarding use if or when the binding prefix or mask matches a known route. Static label bindings are not supported for local prefixes, which are connected networks, summarized routes, default routes, and supernets. These prefixes use implicit-null or explicit-null as the local label.
mpls static binding ipv4 Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference January 2010 MP-283
mpls static binding ipv4 vrf mpls static binding ipv4 vrf To bind a prefix to a local label, use the mpls static binding ipv4 vrf command in global configuration mode. To remove static binding between the prefix and label, use the no form of this command. mpls static binding ipv4 vrf vpn-name prefix mask {input label | label} no mpls static binding ipv4 vrf vpn-name prefix mask [input label | label] Syntax Description vpn-name The VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.
mpls static binding ipv4 vrf Examples The following example binds a prefix to local label 17: Router(config)# mpls static binding ipv4 vrf vpn100 10.66.0.0 255.255.0.0 input 17 Related Commands Command Description show mpls static binding ipv4 vrf Displays configured static bindings.
mpls static crossconnect mpls static crossconnect To configure a Label Forwarding Information Base (LFIB) entry for the specified incoming label and outgoing interface, use the mpls static crossconnect command in global configuration mode. To remove the LFIB entry, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng mpls traffic-eng To configure a router running Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) so that it floods Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) link information into the indicated IS-IS level, use the mpls traffic-eng command in router configuration mode. To disable the flooding of MPLS TE link information into the indicated IS-IS level, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng administrative-weight mpls traffic-eng administrative-weight To override the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) administrative weight (cost) of the link, use the mpls traffic-eng administrative-weight command in interface configuration mode. To disable the override, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng area mpls traffic-eng area To configure a router running Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) so that it floods traffic engineering for the indicated OSPF area, use the mpls traffic-eng area command in router configuration mode. To disable flooding of traffic engineering for the indicated OSPF area, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng area number no mpls traffic-eng area number Syntax Description number Defaults Flooding is disabled.
mpls traffic-eng area Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng router-id Specifies that the traffic engineering router identifier for the node is the IP address associated with a given interface. network area Defines the interfaces on which OSPF runs and defines the area ID for those interfaces. router ospf Configures an OSPF routing process on a router.
mpls traffic-eng atm cos global-pool mpls traffic-eng atm cos global-pool Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls traffic-eng atm cos global-pool command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To specify the class of service for all global pools in traffic engineering tunnels traversing XTagATM interfaces on an ATM-label switch router (LSR), use the mpls traffic-eng atm cos global-pool command in global configuration mode.
mpls traffic-eng atm cos sub-pool mpls traffic-eng atm cos sub-pool Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the mpls traffic-eng atm cos sub-pool command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To specify the class of service for all subpools in traffic engineering tunnels traversing XTagATM interfaces on an ATM-label switch router (LSR), use the mpls traffic-eng atm cos sub-pool command in global configuration mode.
mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags To set the user-specified attribute flags for the interface, use the mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags command in interface configuration mode. To disable the user-specified attribute flags for the interface, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags attributes no mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags Syntax Description attributes Attributes that will be compared to a tunnel’s affinity bits during selection of a path.
mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng administrative-weight Overrides the IGP administrative weight of the link. tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity Configures affinity (the properties that the tunnel requires in its links) for an MPLS traffic engineering tunnel.
mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers To enable automatic bandwidth adjustment for a platform and to start output rate sampling for tunnels configured for automatic bandwidth adjustment, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers command in global configuration mode. To disable automatic bandwidth adjustment for the platform, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers Examples The following example shows how to designate that for each Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel, the output rate is sampled once every 10 minutes (every 600 seconds): Router(config)# mpls traffic–eng auto–bw timers frequency 600 Related Commands Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw Enables automatic bandwidth adjustment for a tunnel, specifies the frequency with which tunnel bandwidth can be automatically adjusted, and
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup To automatically build next-hop (NHOP) and next-next hop (NNHOP) backup tunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup command in global configuration mode. To delete the NHOP and NNHOP backup tunnels, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup no mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup Command Description mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup timers Configures how frequently a timer will scan backup autotunnels and remove tunnels that are not being used. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup tunnel-num Configures the range of tunnel interface numbers for backup autotunnels.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup config mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup config To enable IP processing without an explicit address, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup config command in global configuration mode. To disable IP processing without an explicit address, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup nhop-only mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup nhop-only To automatically build next-hop (NHOP) backup tunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup nhop-only command in global configuration mode. To delete the NHOP backup tunnels, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup nhop-only no mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup nhop-only Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup srlg exclude mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup srlg exclude To specify that autocreated backup tunnels should avoid Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLGs) of the protected interface, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup srlg exclude command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup timers mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup timers To configure how frequently a timer will scan backup autotunnels and remove tunnels that are not being used, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup timers command in global configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup tunnel-num mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup tunnel-num To configure the range of tunnel interface numbers for backup autotunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel backup tunnel-num command in global configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh To enable autotunnel mesh groups globally, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh command in global configuration mode. To disable autotunnel mesh groups globally, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh no mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Autotunnel mesh groups are not enabled globally.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh tunnel-num mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh tunnel-num To configure a range of mesh tunnel interface numbers, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh tunnel-num command in global configuration mode. To use the default values, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh tunnel-num Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Displays the cloned mesh tunnel interfaces of each autotemplate interface and the current range of mesh tunnel interface numbers.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config To enable IP processing without an explicit address, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config command in global configuration mode. To disable this capability, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config mpls ip mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config mpls ip To enable Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) on primary autotunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary config mpls ip command in global configuration mode. To disable LDP on primary autotunnels, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary onehop mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary onehop To automatically create primary tunnels to all next hops, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary onehop command in global configuration mode. To disable the automatic creation of primary tunnels to all next hops, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary onehop no mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary onehop Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary timers mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary timers To configure how many seconds after a failure primary autotunnels are removed, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary timers command in global configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary tunnel-num mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary tunnel-num To configure the range of tunnel interface numbers for primary autotunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel primary tunnel-num command in global configuration mode. To disable this configuration, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng backup-path mpls traffic-eng backup-path To assign one or more backup tunnels to a protected interface, use the mpls traffic-eng backup-path command in interface configuration mode. mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunneltunnel-id Syntax Description tunneltunnel-id Command Default No backup tunnels are used if this interface goes down. Command Modes Interface configuration Command History Release Modification 12.0(10)ST This command was introduced. 12.
mpls traffic-eng backup-path Related Commands Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute Enables an MPLS traffic engineering tunnel to use a backup tunnel if there is a link or node failure (provided that a backup tunnel exists).
mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunnel To configure the physical interface to use a backup tunnel in the event of a detected failure on that interface, use the mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunnel command in interface configuration mode. mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunnel interface Syntax Description interface Command Default This command is disabled by default. Command Modes Interface configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model To enable a Bandwidth Constraints Model to be used by a router in DiffServ-aware Traffic Engineering, use the mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model global configuration command. (Using the no form of this command selects the default model, which is the Russian Dolls Model.) mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model [rdm | mam] no mpls traffic-eng ds-te bc-model [ rdm | mam ] Syntax Description rdm Russian Dolls Model. (Described in IETF RFC 4127).
mpls traffic-eng ds-te mode mpls traffic-eng ds-te mode To configure a router to enter DiffServ-aware Traffic Engineering modes which incorporate degrees of the IETF Standard, use the mpls traffic-eng ds-te mode global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return the router to the pre-IETF-Standard mode.
mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute backup-prot-preemption mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute backup-prot-preemption To change the backup protection preemption algorithm to minimize the amount of bandwidth that is wasted, use the mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute backup-prot-preemption command in global configuration mode. To use the default algorithm of minimizing the number of label-switched paths (LSPs) that are demoted, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute backup-prot-preemption The backup tunnel currently is protecting LSP1 through LSP5, which have the following bandwidth, and do not have backup bandwidth protection (that is, the “bandwidth protection desired” bit was not set via the tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute command): • LSP1: 10 units • LSP2: 20 units • LSP3: 30 units • LSP4: 60 units • LSP5: 100 units As shown, LSP1 through LSP5 use 220 units of bandwidth.
mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute timers mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute timers To specify how often the router considers switching a label switched path (LSP) to a new (better) backup tunnel if additional backup bandwidth becomes available, use the mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute timers command in global configuration mode. To disable this timer, set the seconds value to zero or use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds To set a reserved bandwidth thresholds for a link, use the mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds {down | up} percent [percent ...] no mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds {down | up} Syntax Description down Sets the thresholds for decreased reserved bandwidth.
mpls traffic-eng flooding thresholds Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding Sets the length of the interval used for periodic flooding. show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Displays local link information currently being flooded by MPLS traffic engineering link management into the global traffic engineering topology. show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Displays current local link information.
mpls traffic-eng interface mpls traffic-eng interface To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic Engineering (TE) link-state advertisement (LSA) for an interface to be advertised into the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area 0, use the mpls traffic-eng interface command in router configuration mode. To restore the setting of the MPLS TE LSA to the same area as the router LSA, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng link timers bandwidth-hold mpls traffic-eng link timers bandwidth-hold To set the length of time that bandwidth is held for a Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) PATH (Set Up) message while waiting for the corresponding RSVP RESV message to come back, use the mpls traffic-eng link timers bandwidth-hold command in global configuration mode.
mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding To set the length of the interval used for periodic flooding, use the mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding command in global configuration mode. mpls traffic-eng link timers periodic-flooding interval Syntax Description interval Defaults 180 seconds Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.
mpls traffic-eng link-management timers bandwidth-hold mpls traffic-eng link-management timers bandwidth-hold To set the length of time that bandwidth is held for an RSVP path (setup) message while you wait for the corresponding RSVP Resv message to come back, use the mpls traffic-eng link-management timers bandwidth-hold command in global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng link-management timers periodic-flooding mpls traffic-eng link-management timers periodic-flooding To set the length of the interval for periodic flooding, use the mpls traffic-eng link-management timers periodic-flooding command in global configuration mode. To disable the specified interval length for periodic flooding, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng logging lsp mpls traffic-eng logging lsp To log certain traffic engineering label switched path (LSP) events, use the mpls traffic-eng logging lsp command in global configuration mode. To disable logging of LSP events, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng logging lsp Related Commands Command Description access-list (extended) Defines an extended IP access list. logging console Limits the number of messages logged to the console. mpls traffic-eng logging tunnel Logs certain traffic engineering tunnel events. show logging Displays the messages that are logged in the buffer.
mpls traffic-eng logging tunnel mpls traffic-eng logging tunnel To log certain traffic engineering tunnel events, use the mpls traffic-eng logging tunnel command in global configuration mode. To disable logging of traffic engineering tunnel events, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng logging tunnel Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference MP-330 January 2010
mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes To create or modify a label switched path (LSP) attribute list, use the mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes command in global configuration mode. To remove a specified LSP attribute list from the device configuration, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes string no mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes string Syntax Description string Command Default An LSP attribute list is not created unless you create one.
mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes • protection—Enables failure protection. • record-route—Records the route used by the LSP. The following monitoring and management commands are also available in the LSP Attributes configuration mode: Examples • exit—Exits from LSP Attributes configuration mode. • list—Relists all the entries in the LSP attribute list. • no—Removes a specific attribute from the LSP attribute list.
mpls traffic-eng mesh-group mpls traffic-eng mesh-group To configure a mesh group in an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) to allow Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) label switch routers (LSRs) that belong to the same mesh group to signal tunnels to the local router, use the mpls traffic-eng mesh-group command in router configuration mode. To disable signaling of tunnels from LSRs in the same mesh group to the local router, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng mesh-group Related Commands Command Description tunnel destination mesh-group Configures an autotemplate to signal tunnels to all other members of a specified mesh group.
mpls traffic-eng multicast-intact mpls traffic-eng multicast-intact To configure a router running Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) so that Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) can work together, use the mpls traffic-eng multicast-intact command in router configuration mode. To disable interoperability between PIM and MPLS TE, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng passive-interface mpls traffic-eng passive-interface To configure a link as a passive interface between two Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBRs), use the mpls traffic-eng passive-interface command in interface configuration mode. To disable the passive link, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng passive-interface If two autonomous systems use different IGPs and have more than one neighbor on the link, you must enter the nbr-igp-id keyword followed by isis or ospf and the sysid. The sysid must be unique for each neighbor. For a broadcast link (that is, other Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)) features are using the passive link), you must enter the nbr-if-addr keyword. For an RSVP Hello configuration on an Inter-AS link, all keywords are required.
mpls traffic-eng path-option list mpls traffic-eng path-option list To configure a path option list, use the mpls traffic-eng path-option list command in global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng path-option list [name pathlist-name | identifier pathlist-number] no mpls traffic-eng path-option list [name pathlist-name | identifier pathlist-number] Syntax Description name pathlist-name Specifies the name of the path option list.
mpls traffic-eng path-option list Related Commands Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng path option Configures a path option for an MPLS TE tunnel. tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect Configures a secondary path option or a path option list for an MPLS TE tunnel.
mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric To specify the metric type to use for path selection for tunnels for which the metric type has not been explicitly configured, use the mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric command in global configuration mode. To remove the specified metric type, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric Router(config)# mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric igp Related Commands Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric Specifies the metric type to use when calculating a tunnel’s path.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize mpls traffic-eng reoptimize To force immediate reoptimization of all traffic engineering tunnels, use the mpls traffic-eng reoptimize command in privileged EXEC mode. mpls traffic-eng reoptimize Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)ST This command was introduced. 12.1(3)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.1(3)T. 12.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize events mpls traffic-eng reoptimize events To turn on automatic reoptimization of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering when certain events occur, such as when an interface becomes operational, use the mpls traffic-eng reoptimize events command in global configuration mode. To disable automatic reoptimization, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay To delay removal of old label switched paths (LSPs) or installation of new LSPs after tunnel reoptimization, use the mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay command in global configuration mode. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay The following example shows how to set the reoptimization installation delay time to one hour: Router# configure Router(config)# mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay installation 5 Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng reoptimize Forces immediate reoptimization of all traffic engineering tunnels.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers frequency mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers frequency To control the frequency with which tunnels with established label switched paths (LSPs) are checked for better LSPs, use the mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers frequency command in global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers frequency Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng reoptimize Reoptimizes all traffic engineering tunnels immediately. mpls traffic-eng reoptimize timers delay Delays removal of old LSPs or installation of new LSPs after tunnel reoptimization. tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option Configures a path option for an MPLS traffic engineering tunnel.
mpls traffic-eng router-id mpls traffic-eng router-id To specify that the traffic engineering router identifier for the node is the IP address associated with a given interface, use the mpls traffic-eng router-id command in router configuration mode. To remove the traffic engineering router identifier, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng router-id interface-name no mpls traffic-eng router-id Syntax Description interface-name Defaults No traffic engineering router identifier is specified.
mpls traffic-eng scanner mpls traffic-eng scanner To specify how often Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) extracts traffic engineering type, length, values (TLVs) objects from flagged label switched paths (LSPs) and passes them to the traffic engineering topology database, and the maximum number of LSPs that the router can process immediately, use the mpls traffic-eng scanner command in router configuration mode.
mpls traffic-eng scanner Usage Guidelines When IS-IS receives a new LSP, it inserts it into the IS-IS database. If the LSP contains traffic engineering TLVs, IS-IS flags the LSPs for transmission to the traffic engineering database. Depending on the default or user-specified interval, traffic engineering TLVs are extracted and sent to the traffic engineering database. Users can also specify the maximum number of LSPs that the router can process immediately.
mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise implicit-null mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise implicit-null To use the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) encoding for the implicit-null label in signaling messages sent to neighbors that match the specified access list, use the mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise implicit-null command in router configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng srlg mpls traffic-eng srlg To configure the Shared Risk Link Group (SRLG) membership of a link (interface), use the mpls traffic-eng srlg command in interface configuration mode. To remove a link from membership of one or more SRLGs, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng srlg [num] no mpls traffic-eng srlg [num] Syntax Description num Command Default A link does not have membership in any SRLG.
mpls traffic-eng topology holddown sigerr mpls traffic-eng topology holddown sigerr To specify the amount of time that a router ignores a link in its traffic engineering topology database in tunnel path Constrained Shortest Path First (CSPF) computations following a traffic engineering tunnel error on the link, use the mpls traffic-eng topology holddown sigerr command in global configuration mode.
mpls traffic-eng topology holddown sigerr Examples In the following example, the link hold-down time for signaling errors is set at 15 seconds: Router(config)# mpls traffic-eng topology holddown sigerr 15 Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng topology Displays the MPLS traffic engineering global topology as currently known at the node.
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global configuration) mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global configuration) To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel signaling on a device, use the mpls traffic-eng tunnels command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS traffic engineering tunnel signaling, use the no form of this command. mpls traffic-eng tunnels no mpls traffic-eng tunnels Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults The command is disabled.
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface configuration) mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface configuration) To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel signaling on an interface (assuming that it is enabled on the device), use the mpls traffic-eng tunnels command in interface configuration mode. To disable MPLS traffic engineering tunnel signaling on the interface, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface configuration) Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp bandwidth Enables RSVP for IP on an interface. mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global configuration) Enables MPLS traffic engineering tunnel signaling on a device.
mpls ttl-dec mpls ttl-dec To specify standard Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) tagging, use the mpls ttl-dec command in global configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command. mpls ttl-dec no mpls ttl-dec Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Optimized MPLS tagging (no mpls ttl-dec). Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
mtu mtu To adjust the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, use the mtu command in interface configuration mode, connect configuration submode, or xconnect subinterface configuration mode. To restore the MTU value to its original default value, use the no form of this command. mtu bytes no mtu Syntax Description bytes Defaults Table 11 lists default MTU values according to media type. Table 11 MTU size, in bytes.
mtu Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(33)SCB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SCB. Cisco IOS XE Release 2.4 This command was modified. Support for the xconnect subinterface configuration mode was added for this command. The command was integrated into Cisco IOS XE Release 2.4. Each interface has a default maximum packet size or MTU size. This number generally defaults to the largest size possible for that interface type.
mtu – Dot1Q header—4 bytes – CRC—4 bytes Note Examples • If you are using MPLS, be sure that the mpls mtu command is configured for a value less than or equal to the interface MTU. • If you are using MPLS labels, then you should increase the default interface MTU size to accommodate the number of MPLS labels. Each MPLS label adds 4 bytes of overhead to a packet. For the Gigabit Ethernet SPAs on the Cisco uBR10012 router, the default MTU size is 1500 bytes.
neighbor activate neighbor activate To enable the exchange of information with a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) neighbor, use the neighbor activate command in address family configuration mode or router configuration mode. To disable the exchange of an address with a BGP neighbor, use the no form of this command.
neighbor activate Usage Guidelines Use this command to advertise address information in the form of an IP or IPv6 prefix. The address prefix information is known as Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI) in BGP. Examples Address Exchange Example for Address Family vpn4 The following example shows how to enable address exchange for address family vpnv4 for all neighbors in the BGP peer group named PEPEER and for the neighbor 10.0.0.
neighbor allowas-in neighbor allowas-in To configure provider edge (PE) routers to allow readvertisement of all prefixes containing duplicate autonomous system numbers (ASNs), use the neighbor allowas-in command in router configuration mode. To disable the readvertisement of the ASN of the PE router, use the no form of this command. neighbor ip-address allowas-in [number] no neighbor allowas-in [number] Syntax Description ip-address IP address of the neighboring router.
neighbor allowas-in Examples The following example shows how to configure the PE router with ASN 100 to allow prefixes from the VRF address family Virtual Private Network (VPN) IPv4 vrf1. The neighboring PE router with the IP address 192.168.255.255 is set to be readvertised to other PE routers with the same ASN six times. Router(config)# router bgp 100 Router(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 Router(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.255.
neighbor as-override neighbor as-override To configure a provider edge (PE) router to override the autonomous system number (ASN) of a site with the ASN of a provider, use the neighbor as-override command in router configuration mode. To remove Virtual Private Network (VPN) IPv4 prefixes from a specified router, use the no form of this command. neighbor ip-address as-override no neighbor ip-address as-override Syntax Description ip-address Defaults Automatic override of the ASN is disabled.
neighbor as-override Related Commands Command Description neighbor activate Enables the exchange of information with a BGP neighboring router. neighbor remote-as Allows a neighboring router’s IP address to be included in the BGP routing table. neighbor update-source Allows internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface for TCP/IP connections. route-map Redistributes routes from one routing protocol to another.
neighbor inter-as-hybrid neighbor inter-as-hybrid To configure the eBGP peer router (ASBR) as an Inter-AS Option AB peer, use the neighbor inter-as-hybrid command. • Advertised routes have the route targets (RTs) that are configured on the VRF. Advertised routes do not have their original RTs. • If any prefixes are imported into Option AB VRFs, then the imported paths are advertised to this peer.
neighbor send-label neighbor send-label To enable a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) router to send Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) labels with BGP routes to a neighboring BGP router, use the neighbor send-label command in address family configuration mode or router configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
neighbor send-label Use this command in IPv6 address family configuration mode to bind and advertise IPv6 prefix MPLS labels. Using this command in conjunction with the mpls ipv6 source-interface global configuration command allows IPv6 traffic to run over an IPv4 MPLS network without any software or hardware configuration changes in the backbone. Edge routers configured to run both IPv4 and IPv6 forward IPv6 traffic using MPLS and multiprotocol internal BGP (MP-iBGP).
neighbor send-label explicit-null neighbor send-label explicit-null To enable a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) router to send Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) labels with explicit-null information for a CSC-CE router and BGP routes to a neighboring CSC-PE router, use the neighbor send-label explicit-null command in address family configuration mode or router configuration mode. To disable a BGP router from sending MPLS labels with explicit-null information, use the no form of this command.
neighbor send-label explicit-null Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.0.0.2 send-label explicit-null In the following CSC-PE example, CSC is configured with BGP to distribute labels: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# router bgp 300 Router(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 100 Router(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf v1 Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.0.0.
next-address next-address To specify the next IP address in the explicit path, use the next-address command in IP explicit path configuration mode. next-address [loose | strict] ip-address Syntax Description loose (Optional) Specifies that the previous address (if any) in the explicit path need not be directly connected to the next IP address, and that the router is free to determine the path from the previous address (if any) to the next IP address.
next-address • In Cisco IOS Releases 12.2(33)SRD and 12.4(24)T, and Cisco XE Release 2.4 and earlier releases, you cannot specify an explicit path that uses a link address as the first hop and then node addresses as the subsequent hops. However, you can use a node address as the first hop andlink addresses as the subsequent hops. • In Cisco IOS Releases after 12.2(33)SRD, 12.4(24)T , and Cisco XE Release 2.4, you can use a link address as the first hop and then node addresses as the subsequent hops.
oam retry oam retry To configure parameters related to Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) management for an ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC), switched virtual circuit (SVC), VC class, or VC bundle, or label-controlled ATM (LC-ATM) VC, use the oam retry command in the appropriate command mode. To remove OAM management parameters, use the no form of this command.
oam retry Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.1(5)T This command was implemented in PVC range and PVC-in-range configuration modes. 12.3(2)T This command was implemented in control-VC configuration mode. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.2SX This command is supported in the Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX train. Support in a specific 12.2SX release of this train depends on your feature set, platform, and platform hardware.
oam retry Related Commands Command Description broadcast Configures broadcast packet duplication and transmission for an ATM VC class, PVC, SVC, or VC bundle. class-int Assigns a VC class to an ATM main interface or subinterface. class-vc Assigns a VC class to an ATM PVC, SVC, or VC bundle member. encapsulation Sets the encapsulation method used by the interface. inarp Configures the Inverse ARP time period for an ATM PVC, VC class, or VC bundle.
oam-ac emulation-enable oam-ac emulation-enable To enable Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) cell emulation on ATM adaptation layer 5 (AAL5) over Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol Version 3 (L2TPv3), use the oam-ac emulation-enable command in the appropriate configuration mode on both provider edge (PE) routers. To disable OAM cell emulation, use the no form of this command on both routers.
oam-ac emulation-enable Examples The following example shows how to enable OAM cell emulation on an ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC): Router# interface ATM 1/0/0 Router(config-if)# pvc 1/200 l2transport Router(config-if-atm-l2trans-pvc)# oam-ac emulation-enable The following example shows how to set the rate at which an AIS cell is sent every 30 seconds: Router# interface ATM 1/0/0 Router(config-if)# pvc 1/200 l2transport Router(config-if-atm-l2trans-pvc)# oam-ac emulation-enable 30 The following exa
oam-pvc oam-pvc To enable end-to-end F5 Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) loopback cell generation and OAM management for an ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC), virtual circuit (VC) class, or label-controlled ATM (LC-ATM) VC, use the oam-pvc command in the appropriate command mode. To disable generation of OAM loopback cells and OAM management, use the no form of this command.
oam-pvc Command Default OAM management and loop detection are disabled. Command Modes ATM VC class configuration (for a VC class) ATM VC configuration (for an ATM PVC or loopback mode detection) Control-VC configuration (for enabling OAM management on an LC-ATM VC) PVC-in-range configuration (for an individual PVC within a PVC range) Command History Release Modification 11.3 This command was introduced. 12.1(5)T This command was implemented in PVC-in-range configuration mode. 12.
oam-pvc Examples The following example shows how to enable end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell transmission and OAM management on an ATM PVC with a transmission frequency of 3 seconds: Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam-pvc manage 3 The following example shows how to enable end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell transmission and OAM management on an LC-ATM interface with a transmission frequency of 2 seconds: Router(config)# interface Switch1.
ping mpls ping mpls To check Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) label switched path (LSP) connectivity, use the ping mpls command in privileged EXEC mode.
ping mpls revision {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} (Optional) Selects the type, length, values (TLVs) version of the implementation. Use the revision 4 default unless attempting to interoperate with devices running Cisco IOS Release 12.0(27)S1 or 12.0(27)S2. If you do not select a revision keyword, the software uses the latest version. See Table 12 in the “Revision Keyword Usage” section of the “Usage Guidelines” section for information on when to select the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keywords.
ping mpls verbose (Optional) Displays the MPLS echo reply sender address of the packet and displays return codes. revision tlv-revision-number (Optional) Cisco TLV revision number. force-explicit-null (Optional) Forces an explicit null label to be added to the MPLS label stack even though the label was unsolicited. output interface tx-interface (Optional) Specifies the output interface for echo requests. nexthop ip-address (Optional) Causes packets to go through the specified next-hop address.
ping mpls Release Modification Cisco IOS XE Release 2.3 This command was updated with the segment keyword. 12.2(33)SRE This command was modified. Restrictions were added to the pseudowire keyword. Usage Guidelines Note It is recommended that you use the mpls oam global configuration command instead of this command. Use the ping mpls command to validate, test, or troubleshoot IPv4 LDP LSPs, IPv4 Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) TE tunnels, and AToM VCs.
ping mpls • output • revision • ttl Revision Keyword Usage The revision keyword allows you to issue a ping mpls ipv4, ping mpls pseudowire, or trace mpls traffic-eng command based on the format of the TLV. Table 12 lists the revision option and usage guidelines for each option. Table 12 Revision Options and Option Usage Guidelines Revision Option Option Usage Guidelines 11 Not supported in Cisco IOS Release 12.4(11)T or later releases. Version 1 (draft-ietf-mpls-ping-03).
ping mpls Type escape sequence to abort. ! 10.131.191.230, return code ! 10.131.191.230, return code ! 10.131.191.230, return code ! 10.131.191.230, return code ! 10.131.191.230, return code 3 3 3 3 3 Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 100/102/112 ms The following example shows how to invoke the ping mpls command in the interactive mode to check MPLS LSP connectivity: Router# ping Protocol [ip]: mpls Target IPv4, pseudowire or traffic-eng [ipv4]: ipv4 Target IPv4 address: 10.
ping mpls Note The “Destination end address” and “Destination address increment” prompts display only if you enter an address at the “Destination address or destination start address” prompt. Also, the “Sweep min size,” “Sweep max size,” and “Sweep interval” prompts display only if you enter “yes” at the “Sweep range of sizes? [no]” prompt.
ping mpls Building configuration... Current configuration : 129 bytes ! interface Ethernet2/0 no ip address no ip directed-broadcast no cdp enable xconnect 10.131.191.252 333 pw-class test1 end Router# show running-config | begin pseudowire pseudowire-class test1 encapsulation mpls preferred-path interface Tunnel0 ! In such cases, you can use an LSP ping to verify the connectivity of the LSP that a certain pseudowire is taking, be it LDP based or a TE tunnel: Router# ping mpls pseudowire 10.131.191.
ping mpls Sending 5, 1476-byte MPLS Echos to 10.131.191.252, timeout is 2 seconds: Codes: '!' - success, 'Q' - request not sent, '.' - timeout, 'L' - labeled output interface, 'B' - unlabeled output interface, 'D' - DS Map mismatch, 'F' - no FEC mapping, 'f' - FEC mismatch, 'M' - malformed request, 'm' - unsupported tlvs, 'N' - no rx label, 'P' - no rx intf label prot, 'p' - premature termination of LSP, 'R' - transit router, 'X' - unknown return code, 'x' - return code 0 Type escape sequence to abort.
preferred-path preferred-path To specify the path that traffic uses (a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic engineering (TE) tunnel or destination IP address and Domain Name Server (DNS) name), use the preferred-path command in pseudowire configuration mode. To disable tunnel selection, use the no form of this command.
preferred-path Examples • If you select a tunnel, the tunnel tailend must be on the remote PE router. • If you specify an IP address, that address must be the IP address of the loopback interface on the remote PE. The address must have a /32 mask.
priority (LSP Attributes) priority (LSP Attributes) To specify the label switched path (LSP) priority in an LSP attribute list, use the priority command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To remove the specified priority, use the no form of this command. priority setup-priority [hold-priority] no priority Syntax Description setup-priority Priority used when signaling an LSP to determine which existing LSPs can be preempted.
priority (LSP Attributes) Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Creates or modifies an LSP attribute list. show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Displays global LSP attribute lists.
protection (LSP Attributes) protection (LSP Attributes) To configure failure protection on the label switched path (LSP) in an LSP attribute list, use the protection command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To disable failure protection, use the no form of this command. protection fast-reroute no protection Syntax Description fast-reroute Command Default Failure protection is not enabled for the LSP in the LSP attribute list.
protection local-prefixes protection local-prefixes To enable PE-CE link protection by preserving the local label (due to a link failure that caused BGP to begin reconverging), use the protection local-prefixes command. To disable this form of link protection, use the no form of this command: [no] protection local-prefixes Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default This protection is disabled by default. Command Modes VRF configuration (config-vrf).
protection local-prefixes The following example enables local protection in an IPv4-only version of Cisco IOS: ip vrf vpn1 rd 100:3 protection local prefixes Related Commands Command Description bfd interval min_rx multiplier Enables BFD on the interface. neighbor fall-over bfd Enables BFD support for fallover.
pseudowire pseudowire To bind an attachment circuit to a Layer 2 pseudowire for xconnect service, use the pseudowire command in interface configuration mode. pseudowire peer-ip-address vcid pw-class pw-class-name [sequencing {transmit | receive | both}] Syntax Description peer-ip-address The IP address of the remote peer. vcid The 32-bit identifier of the virtual circuit between the routers at each end of the Layer 2 control channel.
pseudowire Examples The following example creates a virtual-PPP interface with the number 1, configures PPP on the virtual-PPP interface, and binds the attachment circuit to a Layer 2 pseudowire for xconnect service for the pseudowire class named pwclass1: interface virtual-ppp 1 ppp authentication chap ppp chap hostname peer1 pseudowire 172.24.13.
pseudowire-class pseudowire-class To specify the name of a Layer 2 pseudowire class and enter pseudowire class configuration mode, use the pseudowire-class command in global configuration mode. To remove a pseudowire class configuration, use the no form of this command. pseudowire-class [pw-class-name] no pseudowire-class [pw-class-name] Syntax Description pw-class-name Command Default No pseudowire classes are defined. Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
pseudowire-class Related Commands Command Description l2tp-class Creates a template of L2TP control plane configuration settings that can be inherited by different pseudowire classes and enters L2TP class configuration mode. pseudowire Binds an attachment circuit to a Layer 2 pseudowire for xconnect service. xconnect Binds an attachment circuit to an L2TPv3 pseudowire for xconnect service and enters xconnect configuration mode.
rd rd To specify a route distinguisher (RD) for a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the rd command in VRF configuration submode. rd route-distinguisher Syntax Description route-distinguisher Command Default There is no default. An RD must be configured for a VRF to be functional. Command Modes VRF configuration submode Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)T This command was introduced. 12.0(21)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS 12.0(21)ST. 12.
rd Examples The following example shows how to configure a default RD for two VRFs. It illustrates the use of both autonomous-system-number-relative and IP-address-relative RDs: Router(config)# ip vrf vrf1 Router(config-vrf)# rd 100:3 Router (config-vrf)# exit Router(config)# ip vrf vrf2 Router(config-vrf)# rd 10.13.0.12:200 Related Commands Command Description ip vrf Configures a VRF routing table. show ip vrf Displays the set of defined VRFs and associated interfaces.
record-route (LSP Attributes) record-route (LSP Attributes) To record the route used by the label switched path (LSP), use the record-route command in LSP Attributes configuration mode. To stop the recording the route used by the LSP, use the no form of this command. record-route no record-route Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default The LSP route is not recorded.
route-target route-target To create a route-target extended community for a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the route-target command in VRF configuration submode. To disable the configuration of a route-target community option, use the no form of this command.
route-target Usage Guidelines Release Modification Cisco IOS XE Release 2.3 This command was modified. Support for 4-byte autonomous system numbers in asdot notation only was added. 12.2(33)SXI1 This command was modified. Support for 4-byte autonomous system numbers in asplain and asdot notation was added. 12.0(33)S3 This command was modified. Support for asplain notation was added and the default format for 4-byte autonomous system numbers is now asplain. Cisco IOS XE Release 2.
route-target address-family ipv4 route-target export route-target import address-family ipv6 route-target export route-target import 100:1 100:1 200:1 200:1 The following example available in Cisco IOS Release 12.0(32)SY8, 12.2(33)SXI1, 12.0(33)S3, Cisco IOS XE Release 2.
sequencing sequencing To configure the direction in which sequencing is enabled for data packets in a Layer 2 pseudowire, use the sequencing command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To remove the sequencing configuration from the pseudowire class, use the no form of this command.
sequencing If you enable sequencing for Layer 2 pseudowires on the Cisco 7500 series routers and you issue the ip cef distributed command, all traffic on the pseudowires is switched through the line cards. It is useful to specify the resync keyword for situations when the disposition router receives many out-of-order packets. It allows the router to recover from situations where too many out-of-order packets are dropped.
set extcomm-list delete set extcomm-list delete To allow the deletion of extended community attributes based on an extended community list, use the set extcomm-list delete command in route-map configuration mode. To negate a previous set extcomm-list detect command, use the no form of this command.
set extcomm-list delete The following example shows how to configure more than one replacement rule using the route-map configuration continue command. Prefixes with RT 100:2 are rewritten to RT 200:3 and prefixes with RT 100:4 are rewritten to RT 200:4. With the continue command, route-map evaluation proceeds even if a match is found in a previous sequence.
set mpls experimental set mpls experimental To set the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) experimental-bit value, use the set mpls experimental command in QoS policy-map configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.
set mpls experimental imposition set mpls experimental imposition To set the value of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) experimental (EXP) field on all imposed label entries, use the set mpls experimental imposition command in QoS policy-map class configuration mode. To disable the setting, use the no form of this command.
set mpls experimental imposition Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(31)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(31)SB. 12.2SX This command is supported in the Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX train. Support in a specific 12.2SX release of this train depends on your feature set, platform, and platform hardware. The set mpls experimental imposition command is supported only on input interfaces. Use this command during label imposition.
set mpls experimental imposition Related Commands Command Description set dscp Marks a packet by setting the Layer 3 DSCP value in the ToS byte. set mpls experimental topmost Sets the MPLS EXP field value in the topmost label on either an input or an output interface. set precedence Sets the precedence value in the packet header. show table-map Displays the configuration of a specified table map or all table maps.
set mpls experimental topmost set mpls experimental topmost To set the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) experimental (EXP) field value in the topmost label on either an input or an output interface, use the set mpls experimental topmost command in QoS policy-map class configuration mode. To disable the setting, use the no form of this command.
set mpls experimental topmost If you specify the qos-group category but do not specify the table keyword and the applicable table-map-name argument, the default action will be to copy the value associated with the qos-group category as the MPLS EXP topmost value. For instance, if you configure the set mpls experimental topmost qos-group command, the QoS group value will be copied and used as the MPLS EXP topmost value. The valid value range for the MPLS EXP topmost value is a number from 0 to 7.
set mpls-label set mpls-label To enable a route to be distributed with a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) label if the route matches the conditions specified in the route map, use the set mpls-label command in route-map configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. set mpls-label no set mpls-label Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default No route with an MPLS label is distributed.
set mpls-label Router(config-route-map)# set mpls-label Related Commands Command Description match ip address Distributes any routes that have a destination network number address that is permitted by a standard or extended access list. match ipv6 address Distributes IPv6 routes that have a prefix permitted by a prefix list or specifies an IPv6 access list to use to match packets for PBR for IPv6.
set ospf router-id set ospf router-id To set a separate Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) router ID for each interface or subinterface on a provider edge (PE) router for each directly attached customer edge (CE) router, use the set ospf router-id command in route map configuration mode. set ospf router-id Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults OSPF router ID is not set. Command Modes Route map configuration Command History Release Modification 12.
set vrf set vrf To enable Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance selection within a route map for policy-based routing VRF selection, use the set vrf command in route-map configuration mode. To disable VRF selection within a route map, use the no form of this command. set vrf vrf-name no set vrf vrf-name Syntax Description vrf-name Command Default VPN VRF instance selection is not enabled within a route map for policy-based routing VRF selection.
set vrf Examples The following example shows a route-map sequence that selects and sets a VRF based on match criteria defined in three different access lists. (The access list configuration is not shown in this example.) If the route map falls through and a match does not occur, the packet will be dropped if the destination is local.
show acircuit checkpoint show acircuit checkpoint To display checkpointing information for each attachment circuit (AC), use the show acircuit checkpoint command in privileged EXEC mode. show acircuit checkpoint Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB. 12.
show acircuit checkpoint On the standby RP, the command displays the following output:: Router# show acircuit checkpoint AC HA AC ---HDLC VLAN Checkpoint info: IW XC Id VCId ---- ---- --- ---LIKE ATOM 3 100 LIKE ATOM 2 1002 Switch -------0 2001 Segment -------0 2001 St -0 2 F-SLP ----001 000 Table 13 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show atm vc show atm vc To display all ATM permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and switched virtual circuits (SVCs) and traffic information, use the show atm vc command in privileged EXEC mode. show atm vc [vcd | interface interface-number] Syntax Description vcd (Optional) Specifies the virtual circuit descriptor (VCD) about which to display information. interface interface-number (Optional) Interface number or subinterface number of the PVC or SVC.
show atm vc VCs on the extended MPLS ATM interfaces do not appear in the show atm vc command output. Instead, the show xtagatm vc command provides a similar output that shows information only on extended MPLS ATM VCs. Examples The following is sample output from the show atm vc command when no vcd value is specified. The status field is either ACTIVE or INACTIVE. Router# show atm vc Interface VCD ATM2/0 1 ATM2/0.4 3 ATM2/0.65432 10 ATM2/0 99 ATM2/0.105 250 ATM2/0.100 300 ATM2/0.
show atm vc InPRoc: 0, OutPRoc: 0, Broadcasts: 0 InFast: 0, OutFast: 0, InAS: 0, OutAS: 0 The following is sample output from the show atm vc command when a vcd value is specified and generation of Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) F5 loopback cells has been enabled: Router# show atm vc 7 ATM4/0: VCD: 7, VPI: 7, VCI: 7 PeakRate: 0, Average Rate: 0, Burst Cells: 0 AAL5-LLC/SNAP, etype:0x0, Flags: 0x30, VCmode: 0xE000 OAM frequency: 10 second(s) InARP DISABLED InPkts: 0, OutPkts: 0, InBytes:
show atm vc The following is sample output from the show atm vc command when a vcd value is specified and there is a PPP-over-ATM connection: Router# show atm vc 1 ATM8/0.
show atm vc Leaf Atm Nsap address: 47.0091810000000002BA08E101.444444444444.02 Leaf Atm Nsap address: 47.0091810000000002BA08E101.333333333333.02 Leaf Atm Nsap address: 47.0091810000000002BA08E101.222222222222.02 The following is sample output from the show atm vc command where no VCD is specified and private VCs are present: Router# show atm vc AAL / Interface ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 ATM1/0 Peak VCD 1 2 3 4 5 15 17 26 28 29 33 Avg.
show atm vc Table 14 show atm vc Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Type Type of VC, either PVC, SVC, TVC, or multipoint SVC (MSVC). • MSVC (with no -x) indicates that VCD is a leaf of some other router’s multipoint VC. • MSVC-x indicates there are x leaf routers for that multipoint VC opened by the root. Type of PVC detected from PVC discovery, either PVC-D, PVC-L, or PVC-M. • PVC-D indicates a PVC created due to PVC discovery.
show atm vc Table 14 show atm vc Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Flags Bit mask describing VC information. The flag values are summed to result in the displayed value.
show atm vc Table 14 Related Commands show atm vc Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description OutFast Number of fast-switched output packets. InAS Number of autonomous-switched or silicon-switched input packets. VC TxRingLimit Transmit Ring Limit for this VC. VC Rx Limit Receive Ring Limit for this VC. Transmit priority ATM service class transmit priority for this VC. InCells Number of incoming cells on this VC. OutCells Number of outgoing cells on this VC.
show connection show connection To display the status of interworking connections, use the show connection command in privileged EXEC mode. show connection [all | element | id ID | name name | port port] Syntax Description all (Optional) Displays information about all interworking connections. element (Optional) Displays information about the specified connection element. id ID (Optional) Displays information about the specified connection identifier.
show connection 2 3 4 5 conn2 conn3 conn4 conn5 ATM ATM ATM ATM 2/0/0 2/0/0 1/0/0 1/0/0 AAL5 AAL5 CELL CELL 0/300 0/400 0/500 100 Serial0/1 16 FA 0/0.1 10 ATM 2/0/0 CELL 0/500 ATM 2/0/0 CELL 100 UP UP UP UP Table 15 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 15 show connection Field Descriptions Field Description ID Arbitrary connection identifier assigned by the operating system. Name Name of the connection.
show controllers vsi control-interface show controllers vsi control-interface Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controller vsi control-interface command is not available in Cisco IOS software.
show controllers vsi descriptor show controllers vsi descriptor Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controllers vsi descriptor command is not available in Cisco IOS software.
show controllers vsi descriptor Phys desc: Log intf: Interface: IF status: Min VPI: Max VPI: Min VCI: Max VCI: 12.2.0 0x000C0200 (0.12.2.0) XTagATM0 up IFC state: ACTIVE 1 Maximum cell rate: 259 Available channels: 32 Available cell rate 65535 Available cell rate 10000 2000 (forward): 10000 (backward): 10000 Table 17 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 17 Related Commands show controllers vsi descriptor Field Descriptions Field Description Phys desc Physical descriptor.
show controllers vsi session show controllers vsi session Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controllers vsi session command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display information about all sessions with Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) slaves, use the show controllers vsi session command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show controllers vsi session ATM0/0 ATM0/0 ATM0/0 ATM0/0 8 9 10 11 9 10 11 12 0/48 0/49 0/50 0/51 0/9 0/10 0/11 0/12 CLOSING ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED Table 18 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 18 show controllers vsi session Field Descriptions Field Description Interface Control interface name. Session Session number (from 0 to ), where n is the number of sessions on the control interface. VCD Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number).
show controllers vsi session Table 19 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 19 show controllers vsi session Field Descriptions Field Description Interface Name of the control interface on which this session is configured. Session number A number from 0 to , where n is the number of slaves. Configured on the MPLS LSC with the slaves option of the tag-control-protocol vsi command. VCD Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number).
show controllers vsi session Table 19 show controllers vsi session Field Descriptions Field Description Max checksums Maximum number of checksum blocks supported by the slave. Current VSI version VSI protocol version currently in use by the master for this session. Min/max VSI version Minimum and maximum VSI versions supported by the slave, as last reported by the slave. If both are zero, the slave has not yet responded to the master. Messages sent Number of commands sent to the slave.
show controllers vsi status show controllers vsi status Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controllers vsi status command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display a one-line summary of each Virtual Switch Interface (VSI)-controlled interface, use the show controllers vsi status command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show controllers vsi status Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show controllers vsi status Table 20 show controllers vsi status Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description IFC State The operational state of the interface, according to the switch.
show controllers vsi traffic show controllers vsi traffic Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controllers vsi traffic command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display traffic information about Virtual Switch Interface (VSI)-controlled interfaces, VSI sessions, or virtual circuits (VCs) on VSI-controlled interfaces, use the show controllers vsi traffic command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show controllers vsi traffic IF status: n/a Rx cells: 304250 Rx cells discarded: 0 Tx cells: 361186 Tx cells discarded: 0 Rx header errors: 4294967254 Rx invalid addresses (per card): 80360 Last invalid address: 0/53 Phys desc: 10.2.0 Interface: XTagATM0 IF status: up Rx cells: 202637 Rx cells discarded: 0 Tx cells: 194979 Tx cells discarded: 0 Rx header errors: 4294967258 Rx invalid addresses (per card): 80385 Last invalid address: 0/32 Phys desc: 10.3.
show controllers vsi traffic Conn Del Cmd: 50 Conn Get Stats Cmd: 0 Conn Cnfg Trap Rsp: 0 Conn Bulk Clr Stats Cmd: 0 Gen Err Rsp: 0 unused: 0 unknown: 0 TOTAL: 3795 Conn Del Rsp: 0 Conn Get Stats Rsp: 0 Conn Cnfg Trap: 0 Conn Bulk Clr Stats Rsp: 0 Gen Err Rsp: 0 unused: 0 unknown: 0 TOTAL: 3795 Table 22 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show controllers vsi traffic Table 22 show controllers vsi traffic session Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Conn Del Rsp Number of VSI “delete connection response” messages received. Conn Get Stats Rsp Number of VSI “get connection statistics response” messages received. Conn Cnfg Trap Number of VSI “connection configuration asynchronous trap” messages received. Conn Bulk Clr Stats Rsp Number of VSI “bulk clear connection statistics response” messages received.
show controllers xtagatm show controllers xtagatm Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show controllers xtagatm command is not available in Cisco IOS software.
show controllers xtagatm Interface XTagATM0 is up Hardware is Tag-Controlled ATM Port (on BPX switch BPX-VSI1) Control interface ATM1/0 is up Physical descriptor is 10.2.0 Logical interface 0x000A0200 (0.10.2.
show controllers xtagatm Table 23 show controllers xtagatm Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Oper state Operational state of the interface, according to the switch.
show controllers xtagatm Related Commands Command Description show controllers vsi descriptor Displays information about a switch interface discovered by the MPLS LSC through the VSI.
show interface tunnel configuration show interface tunnel configuration To display the configuration of a mesh tunnel interface, use the show interface tunnel configuration command in privileged EXEC mode. show interface tunnel num configuration Syntax Description num Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(27)S This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
show interface tunnel configuration Table 24 Related Commands show interface tunnel configuration Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description no keepalive Indicates that no keepalives are set for the mesh tunnel interface. tunnel destination access-list 1 Indicates that access-list 1 is the access list that the template interface will use for obtaining the mesh tunnel interface destination address.
show interface xtagatm show interface xtagatm Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show interface xtagatm command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display information about an extended Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM interface, use the show interface xtagatm command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show interface xtagatm if-number Syntax Description if-number Command Modes User EXEC (>) Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.
show interface xtagatm 5 minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec 5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec 138 packets input, 9193 bytes, 0 no buffer Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 i 00:05:46: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consolegnored, 0 abort 142 packets output, 19686 bytes, 0 underruns 0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets 0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out The following is sample
show interface xtagatm Table 25 show interface xtagatm Field Descriptions Field Description reliability Reliability of the interface as a fraction of 255 (255/255 is 100% reliability), calculated as an exponential average over 5 minutes. Encapsulation ATM Encapsulation method. loopback not set Indicates that loopback is not set. Keepalive set (10 sec) [00:00:08/4] Indicates why the Xtag line is down. Valid values are: 1—Internal usage. 2—Administratively down. 3—Internal usage.
show interface xtagatm Table 25 show interface xtagatm Field Descriptions Field Description 5-minute input rate, 5-minute output rate Average number of bits and packets sent per second in the last 5 minutes. packets input Total number of error-free packets received by the system. bytes Total number of bytes, including data and MAC encapsulation, in the error-free packets received by the system. no buffer Number of received packets discarded because there was no buffer space in the main system.
show interface xtagatm Table 25 Related Commands show interface xtagatm Field Descriptions Field Description output errors Sum of all errors that prevented the final transmission of datagrams out of the interface being examined. Note that this may not balance with the sum of the enumerated output errors, because some datagrams may have more than one error, and others may have errors that do not fall into any of the specifically tabulated categories.
show ip bgp labels show ip bgp labels To display information about Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) labels from the external Border Gateway Protocol (eBGP) route table, use the show ip bgp labels command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip bgp labels Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(21)ST This command was introduced. 12.0(22)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(22)S. 12.
show ip bgp labels Table 26 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 26 Related Commands show ip bgp labels Field Descriptions Field Description Network Displays the network address from the eGBP table. Next Hop Specifies the eBGP next hop address. In Label Displays the label (if any) assigned by this router. Out Label Displays the label assigned by the BGP next hop router. Command Description show ip bgp vpnv4 Displays VPN address information from the BGP table.
show ip bgp neighbors show ip bgp neighbors To display information about Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and TCP connections to neighbors, use the show ip bgp neighbors command in user or privileged EXEC mode. show ip bgp neighbors [ip-address [advertised-routes | dampened-routes | flap-statistics | paths [reg-exp] | received prefix-filter | received-routes | routes | policy [detail]]] Syntax Description ip-address (Optional) IP address of a neighbor.
show ip bgp neighbors Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(21)ST The output was modified to display Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) label information. 12.0(22)S Support for the BGP graceful restart capability was integrated into the output. Support for the Cisco 12000 series routers (Engine 0 and Engine 2) was also added. 12.2(14)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)S. 12.2(15)T Support for the BGP graceful restart capability was integrated into the output. 12.
show ip bgp neighbors Examples Example output is different for the various keywords available for the show ip bgp neighbors command. Examples using the various keywords appear in the following sections: • show ip bgp neighbors: Example, page 464 • show ip bgp neighbors advertised-routes: Example, page 470 • show ip bgp neighbors paths: Example, page 471 • show ip bgp neighbors received prefix-filter: Example, page 471 • show ip bgp neighbors policy: Example, page 472 • Cisco IOS Release 12.
show ip bgp neighbors Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:24:26, due to Peer closed the session External BGP neighbor may be up to 2 hops away. Connection state is ESTAB, I/O status: 1, unread input bytes: 0 Connection is ECN Disabled Local host: 10.108.50.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 10.108.50.
show ip bgp neighbors Table 27 show ip bgp neighbors Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Last read Time, in hhmmss, since BGP last received a message from this neighbor. last write Time, in hhmmss, since BGP last sent a message to this neighbor. hold time Time, in seconds, that BGP will maintain the session with this neighbor without receiving a messages. keepalive interval Time interval, in seconds, at which keepalive messages are transmitted to this neighbor.
show ip bgp neighbors Table 27 show ip bgp neighbors Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Implicit Withdraw Number of times that a prefix has been withdrawn and readvertised. Explicit Withdraw Number of times that prefix has been withdrawn because it is no longer feasible. Used as bestpath Number of received prefixes installed as bestpaths. Used as multipath Number of received prefixes installed as multipaths.
show ip bgp neighbors Table 27 show ip bgp neighbors Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description * Bestpath from iBGP peer Deploys inbound denials because the bestpath came from an iBGP neighbor. * Incorrect RIB for CE Deploys inbound denials due to RIB errors for a CE router. * BGP distribute-list Displays inbound denials due to a distribute list. Number of NLRIs... Number of network layer reachability attributes in updates.
show ip bgp neighbors Table 27 show ip bgp neighbors Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description rcvwnd: TCP window size of the local host. delrcvwnd: Delayed receive window—data the local host has read from the connection, but has not yet subtracted from the receive window the host has advertised to the remote host. The value in this field gradually increases until it is larger than a full-sized packet, at which point it is applied to the rcvwnd field.
show ip bgp neighbors show ip bgp neighbors advertised-routes: Example The following example displays routes advertised for only the 172.16.232.178 neighbor: Router# show ip bgp neighbors 172.16.232.178 advertised-routes BGP table version is 27, local router ID is 172.16.232.181 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network *>i10.0.0.0 *> 10.20.2.0 Next Hop 172.16.232.179 10.0.0.
show ip bgp neighbors Table 28 show ip bgp neighbors advertised-routes Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Metric If shown, this is the value of the inter-autonomous system metric. This field is not used frequently. LocPrf Local preference value as set with the set local-preference route-map configuration command. The default value is 100. Weight Weight of the route as set via autonomous system filters. Path Autonomous system paths to the destination network.
show ip bgp neighbors show ip bgp neighbors policy: Example The following sample output shows the policies applied to the neighbor at 192.168.1.2. The output displays both inherited policies and policies configured on the neighbor device. Inherited polices are policies that the neighbor inherits from a peer-group or a peer-policy template. Router# show ip bgp neighbors 192.168.1.2 policy Neighbor: 192.168.1.
show ip bgp neighbors Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXH: Example The following is sample output from the show ip bgp neighbors command that verifies that the neighbor 192.168.3.2 is a member of the peer group, group192, and belongs to the subnet range group 192.168.0.0/16, which shows that this BGP neighbor was dynamically created. Router# show ip bgp neighbors 192.168.3.2 BGP neighbor is *192.168.3.
show ip bgp vpnv4 show ip bgp vpnv4 To display Virtual Private Network Version 4 (VPNv4) address information from the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) table, use the show ip bgp vpnv4 command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show ip bgp vpnv4 summary (Optional) Displays BGP neighbor status. labels (Optional) Displays incoming and outgoing BGP labels for each NLRI prefix. Command Modes User EXEC (>) Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)T This command was introduced. 12.2(2)T The output of the show ip bgp vpnv4 all ip-prefix command was enhanced to display attributes including multipaths and a best path to the specified network. 12.
show ip bgp vpnv4 Usage Guidelines Use this command to display VPNv4 information from the BGP database. The show ip bgp vpnv4 all command displays all available VPNv4 information. The show ip bgp vpnv4 all summary command displays BGP neighbor status. The show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels command displays explicit-null label information. Examples The following example shows all available VPNv4 information in a BGP routing table: Router# show ip bgp vpnv4 all BGP table version is 18, local router ID is 10.14.
show ip bgp vpnv4 Table 32 show ip bgp vpnv4 rd labels Field Descriptions (continued) In label Displays the label (if any) assigned by this router. Out label Displays the label assigned by the BGP next-hop router. The following example shows VPNv4 routing entries for the VRF named vpn1: Router# show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vpn1 BGP table version is 18, local router ID is 10.14.14.
show ip bgp vpnv4 10.7.7.7 (metric 20) from 10.5.5.5 (10.5.5.5) Origin IGP, metric 0, localpref 100, valid, internal, best Extended Community: RT:100:1 RT:200:1 RT:300:1 RT:400:1 Originator: 10.7.7.7, Cluster list: 10.5.5.5 , recursive-via-host mpls labels in/out nolabel/17 Table 34 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 34 show ip bgp vpnv4 all network-address Field Descriptions Field Description BGP routing table entry for ... Internal version number of the table.
show ip bgp vpnv4 Route Distinguisher: 2:2 (default for vrf bar) 10.1.1.2/32 10.100.100.100 Higher admin distance 10.111.111.112/32 10.9.9.9 Higher admin distance No Yes Table 35 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 35 show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf rib-failure Field Descriptions Field Description Network IP address of a network entity. Next Hop IP address of the next system that is used when forwarding a packet to the destination network. An entry of 0.0.0.
show ip bgp vpnv4 10.0.0.0/8 0.0.0.0 17/aggregate(vpn1) Standby Route Processor Router# show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels Network Masklen In label Route Distinguisher: 100:1 10.12.12.12 /32 16 10.0.0.0 /8 17 Route Distinguisher: 609:1 10.13.13.13 /32 18 Router# show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vpn1 labels Network Masklen In label Route Distinguisher: 100:1 10.12.12.12 /32 16 10.0.0.0 /8 17 Table 36 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show ip bgp vpnv4 Table 37 show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Out label Displays the label assigned by the BGP next-hop router. Route Distinguisher Displays an 8-byte value added to an IPv4 prefix to create a VPN IPv4 prefix. The following example displays separate router IDs for each VRF in the output from an image in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(31)SB2, 12.2(33)SRA, 12.2(33)SXH, 12.4(20)T, Cisco IOS XE Release 2.
show ip bgp vpnv4 not match the RTs imported by the specified VRF. In this situation, the imported path is marked as “not-in-vrf” as shown in the output. Note that on the net for vrf-A, this path is not the bestpath as any paths that are not in the VRFs appear less attractive than paths in the VRF. Router# show ip bgp vpnv4 all 172.17.0.0 BBGP routing table entry for 45000:1:172.17.0.0/16, version 11 Paths: (2 available, best #2, table vrf-A) Flag: 0x820 Not advertised to any peer 2 10.0.101.2 from 10.0.
show ip explicit-paths show ip explicit-paths To display the configured IP explicit paths, use the show ip explicit-paths command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip explicit-paths [name pathname | identifier number] [detail] Syntax Description name pathname (Optional) Displays the pathname of the explicit path. identifier number (Optional) Displays the number of the explicit path. Valid values are from 1 to 65535.
show ip explicit-paths Table 39 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 39 Related Commands show ip explicit-paths Field Descriptions Field Description PATH Pathname or number, followed by the path status. 1: next-address First IP address in the path. 2: next-address Second IP address in the path. Command Description append-after Inserts a path entry after a specific index number. index Inserts or modifies a path entry at a specific index.
show ip multicast mpls vif show ip multicast mpls vif To display the virtual interfaces (VIFs) that are created on the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-multipoint (P2MP) tailend router, use the show ip multicast mpls vif command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip multicast mpls vif Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.2(33)SRE This command was introduced.
show ip ospf database opaque-area show ip ospf database opaque-area To display lists of information related to traffic engineering opaque link-state advertisements (LSAs), also known as Type-10 opaque link area link states, use the show ip ospf database opaque-area command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip ospf database opaque-area Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show ip ospf database opaque-area Table 41 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 41 Related Commands show ip ospf database opaque-area Field Descriptions Field Description LS age Link-state age. Options Type of service options. LS Type Type of the link state. Link State ID Router ID number. Opaque Type Opaque link-state type. Opaque ID Opaque LSA ID number. Advertising Router Advertising router ID.
show ip ospf mpls ldp interface show ip ospf mpls ldp interface To display information about interfaces belonging to an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) process that is configured for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), use the show ip ospf mpls ldp interface command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip ospf [process-id] mpls ldp interface [interface] Syntax Description process-id (Optional) Process ID.
show ip ospf mpls ldp interface Interface is up Loopback1 Process ID 1, Area 0 LDP is not configured through LDP autoconfig LDP-IGP Synchronization : Not required Holddown timer is disabled Interface is up Serial1/2.1 Process ID 1, Area 10.0.1.44 LDP is configured through LDP autoconfig LDP-IGP Synchronization : Required Holddown timer is configured : 1 msecs Holddown timer is not running Interface is up Table 42 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show ip ospf mpls traffic-eng show ip ospf mpls traffic-eng To display information about the links available on the local router for traffic engineering, use the show ip ospf mpls traffic-eng command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip ospf [process-id [area-id] mpls traffic-eng [link] | fragment] Syntax Description process-id (Optional) Internal identification number that is assigned locally when the OSPF routing process is enabled. The value can be any positive integer.
show ip ospf mpls traffic-eng Maximum bandwidth :128000 Maximum reservable bandwidth :250000 Number of Priority :8 Priority 0 :250000 Priority 1 :250000 Priority 2 :250000 Priority 3 :250000 Priority 4 :250000 Priority 5 :250000 Priority 6 :250000 Priority 7 :212500 Affinity Bit :0x0 Link is associated with fragment 0. Link instance is 14 Link connected to Broadcast network Link ID :192.168.1.2 Interface Address :192.168.1.1 Neighbor Address :192.168.1.
show ip protocols vrf show ip protocols vrf To display the routing protocol information associated with a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the show ip protocols vrf command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip protocols vrf vrf-name summary Syntax Description vrf-name Name assigned to a VRF. summary Displays the routing protocol information in summary format. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show ip protocols vrf Table 44 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 44 Related Commands show ip protocols vrf Field Descriptions Field Description Gateway Displays the IP address of the router identifier for all routers in the network. Distance Displays the metric used to access the destination route. Last Update Displays the last time the routing table was updated from the source.
show ip route show ip route To display the current state of the routing table, use the show ip route command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip route [ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | protocol [process-id] | list [access-list-number | access-list-name] | static download] Syntax Description ip-address (Optional) Address about which routing information should be displayed. mask (Optional) Argument for a subnet mask.
show ip route Release Modification 11.3 The output from the show ip route ip-address command was enhanced to display the origination of an IP route in Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) networks. 12.0(1)T The “M—mobile” code was added to the command output. 12.0(3)T The “P—periodic downloaded static route” code was added to the command output. 12.0(4)T The “ia—IS-IS” code was added to the command output. 12.
show ip route E E E E E E E E E E 10.129.0.0 [200/129] via 10.119.254.240, 0:02:22, Ethernet2 10.65.129.0 [200/128] via 10.119.254.244, 0:02:22, Ethernet2 10.10.0.0 [200/128] via 10.119.254.244, 0:02:22, Ethernet2 10.75.139.0 [200/129] via 10.119.254.240, 0:02:23, Ethernet2 10.16.208.0 [200/128] via 10.119.254.244, 0:02:22, Ethernet2 10.84.148.0 [200/129] via 10.119.254.240, 0:02:23, Ethernet2 10.31.223.0 [200/128] via 10.119.254.244, 0:02:22, Ethernet2 10.44.236.0 [200/129] via 10.119.254.
show ip route S S S S S S C C S 10.31.222.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.16.209.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.145.0.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.141.0.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.138.0.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.128.0.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.19.0.0 255.255.255.0 is subnetted, 1 subnets 10.19.64.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.69.0.0 is variably subnetted, 2 subnets, 2 masks 10.69.232.32 255.255.255.240 is directly connected, Ethernet0 10.69.
show ip route I I I I A A I 10.22.0.0 10.30.0.0 10.31.0.0 10.32.0.0 10.34.0.0 10.36.1.1 10.38.1.9 Table 45 255.0.0.0 Serial0 255.0.0.0 Serial0 255.0.0.0 Serial1 255.0.0.0 Serial1 255.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.255 BRI0 200 name remote1 255.255.255.0 192.168.69.1 show ip route Field Descriptions Field Description O Indicates the protocol that derived the route.
show ip route Table 45 show ip route Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description 0:01:00 Specifies the last time the route was updated (in hours:minutes:seconds). Ethernet2 Specifies the interface through which the specified network can be reached. Specific Route Information When you specify that you want information about a specific network displayed, more detailed statistics are shown. The following is sample output from the show ip route command when entered with the IP address 10.0.0.
show ip route The following is sample output using the longer-prefixes keyword. When the longer-prefixes keyword is included, the address and mask pair becomes the prefix, and any address that matches that prefix is displayed. Therefore, multiple addresses are displayed. In the following example, the logical AND operation is performed on the source address 10.0.0.0 and the mask 10.0.0.0, resulting in 10.0.0.0.
show ip route Static Routes Using a DHCP Gateway Examples The following example shows that IP route 10.8.8.0 is directly connected to the Internet and is the next-hop (option 3) default gateway. Routes 10.1.1.1 [1/0], 10.3.2.1 [24/0], and 172.2.2.2 [1/0] are static, and route 10.0.0.0/0 is a default route candidate.
show ip route vrf show ip route vrf To display the IP routing table associated with a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the show ip route vrf command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show ip route vrf Usage Guidelines This command displays specified information from the IP routing table of a VRF.
show ip route vrf Table 47 describes the significant fields shown when the show ip route vrf vrf-name ip-prefix command is used. Table 47 show ip route vrf Field Descriptions Field Description Routing entry for 10.22.22.0/24 Network number. Known via ... Indicates how the route was derived. distance Administrative distance of the information source. metric The metric to reach the destination network. Tag Integer that is used to implement the route.
show ip route vrf Table 48 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 48 show ip route vrf Field Descriptions Field Description MPLS label Displays the BGP prefix from the BGP peer.
show ip rsvp fast bw-protect show ip rsvp fast bw-protect To display information about whether backup bandwidth protection is enabled and the status of backup tunnels that may be used to provide that protection, use the show ip rsvp fast bw-protect command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp fast bw-protect Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default The backup bandwidth protection and backup tunnel status information is not displayed.
show ip rsvp fast bw-protect Table 49 Related Commands show ip rsvp fast bw-protect Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description BW BPS:Type Bandwidth, in bits per second, and type of bandwidth. Possible values are: • S—Subpool • G—Global pool Backup Tunnel:Label Identification of the backup tunnel. State Status of backup tunnel. Valid values are: • Ready—Data is passing through the primary tunnel, but the backup tunnel is ready to take over if the primary tunnel goes down.
show ip rsvp fast detail show ip rsvp fast detail To display specific information for Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) categories, use the show ip rsvp fast detail command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp fast detail Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Specific information for RSVP categories is not displayed. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC’ Command History Release Modification 12.0(24)S This command was introduced 12.
show ip rsvp fast detail Bkup FilerSpec: Tun Sender: 555.5.6.5, LSP ID: 8 Path ID handle: 04000405. Incoming policy: Accepted. Policy source(s): MPLS/TE Status: Proxied Output on POS2/0. Policy status: Forwarding. Handle: 02000406 Table 50 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 50 show ip rsvp fast detail Field Descriptions Field Description Tun Dest IP address of the receiver. Tun ID Tunnel identification number. Ext Tun ID Extended tunnel identification number.
show ip rsvp fast detail Table 50 show ip rsvp fast detail Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Backup Tunnel If the Outbound FRR state is Ready or Active, this field indicates the following: • Which backup tunnel has been selected for this LSP to use in case of a failure. • The inbound label that will be prepended to the LSP’s data packets for acceptance at the backup tunnel tail (the merge point).
show ip rsvp hello show ip rsvp hello To display hello status and statistics for Fast Reroute, reroute (hello state timer), and graceful restart, use the show ip rsvp hello command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.
show ip rsvp hello Table 51 show ip rsvp hello Field Descriptions Field Description RSVP Hello for Fast-Reroute/Reroute Status of Fast-Reroute/Reroute: Statistics BFD for Fast-Reroute/Reroute Graceful Restart Related Commands • Enabled—Fast reroute and reroute (hello for state timer) are activated (enabled). • Disabled—Fast reroute and reroute (hello for state timer) are not activated (disabled). Status of hello statistics: • Enabled—Statistics are configured.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr To display information about all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) clients that use the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol, use the show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr Related Commands Command Description clear ip rsvp hello bfd Globally resets to zero the number of times that the BFD protocol was dropped on an interface or the number of times that a link was down. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (configuration) Enables the BFD protocol globally on the router for MPLS TE link and node protection. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (interface) Enables the BFD protocol on an interface for MPLS TE link and node protection.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail To display detailed information about all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) clients that use the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol, use the show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr detail Related Commands Command Description clear ip rsvp hello bfd Globally resets to zero the number of times that the BFD protocol was dropped on an interface or the number of times that a link was down. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (configuration) Enables the BFD protocol globally on the router for MPLS TE link and node protection. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (interface) Enables the BFD protocol on an interface for MPLS TE link and node protection.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary To display summarized information about all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) clients that use the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) protocol, use the show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show ip rsvp hello bfd nbr summary Related Commands Command Description clear ip rsvp hello bfd Globally resets to zero the number of times that the BFD protocol was dropped on an interface or the number of times that a link was down. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (configuration) Enables the BFD protocol globally on the router for MPLS TE link and node protection. ip rsvp signalling hello bfd (interface) Enables the BFD protocol globally on an interface for MPLS TE link and node protection.
show ip rsvp hello instance detail show ip rsvp hello instance detail To display detailed information about a hello instance, use the show ip rsvp hello instance detail command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello instance detail [filter destination ip-address] Syntax Description filter destination ip-address Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.
show ip rsvp hello instance detail Missed acks: Bad Src_Inst received: Bad Dst_Inst received: I/F went down: Neighbor disabled Hello: Msgs Received: 55590 Sent: 55854 Suppressed: 521 0 0 0 0 0 Neighbor 10.0.0.8 Source 10.0.0.7 Type: Passive (responding to requests) I/F: Serial2/1 Last sent Src_instance: 0xF7A80A52 Last recv nbr's Src_instance: 0xD2F1B7F7 Counters: Msgs Received: 199442 Sent: 199442 Table 55 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show ip rsvp hello instance detail Table 55 show ip rsvp hello instance detail Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Average Average refresh interval. Waverage Weighted average refresh interval. Current Current refresh interval. Last sent Src_instance The last source instance sent to a neighbor. Last recv nbr’s Src_instance The last source instance field value received from a neighbor. (0 means none received.
show ip rsvp hello instance summary show ip rsvp hello instance summary To display summary information about a hello instance, use the show ip rsvp hello instance summary command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello instance summary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.
show ip rsvp hello instance summary Table 56 Related Commands show ip rsvp hello instance summary Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Neighbor IP address of the adjacent node. For graceful restart, this is the neighbor router’s ID; for Fast Reroute and hello state timer (reroute), this is one of the neighbor’s interface addresses. I/F Interface from which hellos are sent for this instance. Any means that the hellos can be sent out any interface. State Status of communication.
show ip rsvp hello statistics show ip rsvp hello statistics To display how long hello packets have been in the Hello input queue, use the show ip rsvp hello statistics command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp hello statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Information about how long hello packets have been in the Hello input queue is not displayed. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show ip rsvp hello statistics Table 57 show ip rsvp hello statistics Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Average Average amount of time, in milliseconds, that hello packets are in the Hello input queue. Max Maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that hello packets have been in the Hello input queue. Current length Current amount of time, in milliseconds, that hello packets have been in the Hello input queue.
show ip rsvp high-availability database show ip rsvp high-availability database To display the contents of the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) high availability (HA) read and write databases used in traffic engineering (TE), use the show ip rsvp high-availability database command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(33)SRA This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRB The command output was modified to display the result of a loose hop expansion performed on the router. 12.2(33)SXH This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXH. 12.2(33)SRC This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRC.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 58 show ip rsvp high-availability database hello—Active RP Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description State Status of an entry. Values are as follows: Action • Ack-Pending—Entries have been sent, but not acknowledged. • Checkpointed—Entries have been sent and acknowledged by the standby RP. • Send-Pending—Entries are waiting to be sent. Action taken. Values are as follows: • Add—Adding an item to the standby RP.
show ip rsvp high-availability database TE LINK WRITE DB Flooding Protocol: ospf IGP Area ID: 0 Link ID: 0 (GigabitEthernet3/2) Header: State: Checkpointed Action: Add Seq #: 4 Flags: 0x0 Data: Ifnumber: 5 Link Valid Flags: 0x193B Link Subnet Type: Broadcast Local Intfc ID: 0 Neighbor Intf ID: 0 Link IP Address: 172.16.3.1 Neighbor IGP System ID: 172.16.3.2 Neighbor IP Address: 10.0.0.0 IGP Metric: 1 TE Metric: 1 Physical Bandwidth: 1000000 kbits/sec Res. Global BW: 3000 kbits/sec Res.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 59 show ip rsvp high-availability database link-management interfaces—Active RP Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description State Status of an entry. Values are as follows: Action • Ack-Pending—Entries have been sent, but not acknowledged. • Checkpointed—Entries have been sent and acknowledged by the standby RP. • Send-Pending—Entries are waiting to be sent. Action taken. Values are as follows: • Add—Adding an item to the standby RP.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 59 show ip rsvp high-availability database link-management interfaces—Active RP Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description TE Metric Metric value for the TE link configured using Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) TE. Physical Bandwidth Link bandwidth capacity (in kilobits per second). Res. Global BW Amount of reservable global pool bandwidth (in kilobits per second) on this link. Res.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 60 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 60 show ip rsvp high-availability database link-management system—Active RP Field Descriptions Field Description TE SYSTEM WRITE DB Storage area for active TE RP system data. This field is blank on a standby RP. Flooding Protocol Protocol that is flooding information for this area. OSPF = Open Shortest Path First. IGP Area ID IGP identifier for the area being flooded.
show ip rsvp high-availability database LSP Example on an Active RP The following is sample output from the show ip rsvp high-availability database lsp command on an active RP: Router# show ip rsvp high-availability database lsp LSP WRITE DB Tun ID: 10 LSP ID: 8 Dest: 10.0.0.9 Sender: 10.0.0.3 Ext. Tun ID: 10.0.0.3 Header: State: Checkpointed Action: Add Seq #: 3 Flags: 0x0 Data: InLabel: Out I/F: Gi3/2 Next-Hop: 172.16.3.1 OutLabel: 17 Loose hop info: 10.0.0.2 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.3 10.1.1.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 61 show ip rsvp high-availability database lsp—Active RP Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Action Action taken. Values are as follows: • Add—Adding an item to the standby RP. • Delete—Deleting an item from the standby RP. This action appears temporarily while the active RP awaits an ack of the delete operation. • Modify—Modifying an item on the standby RP. • Remove—Removing an item from the standby RP.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 62 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 62 show ip rsvp high-availability database lsp-head—Active RP Field Descriptions Field Description LSP_HEAD WRITE DB Storage area for active RP LSP-head data. This field is blank on a standby RP. Tun ID Tunnel identifier. Header Header information. State Status of an entry. Values are as follows: Action • Ack-Pending—Entries have been sent, but not acknowledged.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 62 show ip rsvp high-availability database lsp-head—Active RP Field Descriptions Field Description Id IP address and protocol of the routing node. Values are the following: • isis = Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System • ospf = Open Shortest Path First flag Attribute used to track data. IGP Interior Gateway Protocol. ospf = Open Shortest Path First. IGP area IGP area identifier. Number of hops Number of connections or routers.
show ip rsvp high-availability database Table 63 show ip rsvp high-availability database summary—Active RP Field Descriptions Field Description Ack-Pending Entries have been sent, but are waiting to be acknowledged. Checkpointed Entries have been sent and acknowledged. Total Total number of entries in the write database. Total Total number of entries in the read database.
show ip rsvp host show ip rsvp host To display specific information for a Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) host, use the show ip rsvp host command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp host {senders | receivers} [group-name | group-address] Syntax Description senders RSVP-related sender information currently in the database. receivers RSVP-related receiver information currently in the database. group-name (Optional) Hostname of the source or destination.
show ip rsvp host Table 65 show ip rsvp host senders (No RSVP Identities Configured) Field Descriptions Field Description DPort Destination port number. Code 1 indicates IP protocol such as TCP or UDP. Sport Source port number. Code 1 indicates IP protocol such as TCP or UDP. Prev Hop IP address of the previous hop. Blank means no previous hop. I/F Interface of the previous hop. BPS Reservation rate, in bits per second (bps).
show ip rsvp host Table 66 Related Commands show ip rsvp host senders (RSVP Identity Configured) Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description I/F Interface of the previous hop. BPS Reservation rate in bits per second (bps). Mode(s) Any of the following strings: • Host—The router is acting as the host system or RSVP endpoint for this reservation. • LSP-Tunnel—The reservation is for a Traffic Engineering (TE) tunnel.
show ip rsvp interface detail show ip rsvp interface detail To display the interface configuration for Hello, use the show ip rsvp interface detail command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip rsvp interface detail [interface] Syntax Description interface Command Default The interface configuration for Hello is not displayed. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was introduced. 12.2(18)SXD1 This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.
show ip rsvp interface detail Refresh Interval: FRR: 200 , Reroute: 2000 Missed Acks: FRR: 4 , Reroute: 4 DSCP in HELLOs: FRR: 0x30 , Reroute: 0x30 Table 67 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 67 Related Commands show ip rsvp interface detail Field Descriptions Field Description RSVP Status of the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) protocol (Enabled or Disabled). Interface State Status of the interface (Up or Down).
show ip traffic-engineering show ip traffic-engineering To display information about the traffic engineering configuration and metric information associated with it, use the show ip traffic-engineering command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip traffic-engineering [metrics [detail]] Syntax Description metrics (Optional) Displays metric information associated with traffic engineering. detail (Optional) Displays information in long form.
show ip traffic-engineering • The tunnel headend router’s route to the egress is a connected route. • The egress is unreachable from the tunnel tailend router. Devices request metrics via an LDP adjacency. The display output shows detailed metric information. The metric information includes a metric type (shown as routing_protocol/routing_protocol_subtype) and a metric value.
show ip traffic-engineering Table 68 Related Commands show ip traffic-engineering metrics detail Field Descriptions (continued) flags For metrics being requested by this device, “metric-received” indicates that the other end has responded with a metric value. For metrics being requested from this device, response-pending indicates that the metric value has not yet been sent to the requester. rev An internal identifier for the metric request or advertisement.
show ip traffic-engineering configuration show ip traffic-engineering configuration To display information about configured traffic engineering filters and routes, use the show ip traffic-engineering configuration command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip traffic-engineering configuration [interface] [filter-number] [detail] Syntax Description interface (Optional) Specifies an interface for which to display traffic engineering information.
show ip traffic-engineering configuration Table 69 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 69 Related Commands show ip traffic-engineering configuration detail Field Descriptions Field Description Filter The configured filter identifier for the traffic engineering route. egress The prefix/mask configured with the filter local metric. local metric The routing protocol and metric value of the local LSR for the egress prefix/mask.
show ip traffic-engineering routes show ip traffic-engineering routes To display information about the requested filters configured for traffic engineering, use the show ip traffic-engineering routes command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip traffic-engineering routes [filter-number] [detail] Syntax Description filter-number (Optional) A decimal value representing the number of the filter to display. detail (Optional) Display of command output in long form.
show ip traffic-engineering routes Related Commands Command Description show ip traffic-engineering configuration Displays information about configured traffic engineering filters and routes.
show ip vrf show ip vrf To display the set of defined Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instances and associated interfaces, use the show ip vrf command in privileged EXEC mode. show ip vrf [brief | detail | interfaces | id] [vrf-name] [output-modifiers] Syntax Description brief (Optional) Displays concise information on the VRFs and associated interfaces. detail (Optional) Displays detailed information on the VRFs and associated interfaces.
show ip vrf Usage Guidelines Use this command to display information about VRFs. Two levels of detail are available: • The brief keyword (or no keyword) displays concise information. • The detail keyword displays all information. To display information about all interfaces bound to a particular VRF, or to any VRF, use the interfaces keyword. To display information about VPN IDs assigned to a PE router, use the id keyword.
show ip vrf Table 72 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 72 show ip vrf detail Field Descriptions Field Description VPNID Specifies the VPN ID assigned to the VRF. Interfaces Specifies the network interfaces. Virtual-Accessn [D] Specifies the downstream VRF. Export Specifies VPN route-target export communities. Import Specifies VPN route-target import communities.
show ip vrf Related Commands Command Description import map Configures an import route map for a VRF. ip vrf Configures a VRF routing table. ip vrf forwarding (interface configuration) Associates a VRF with an interface or subinterface. rd Creates routing and forwarding tables for a VRF. route-target Creates a route-target extended community for a VRF. vpn id Assigns a VPN ID to a VRF.
show isis database verbose show isis database verbose To display additional information about the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) database, use the show isis database verbose command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show isis database verbose Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.
show isis database verbose Table 75 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 75 show isis database verbose Field Descriptions Field Description LSPID Link-state packet (LSP) identifier. The first six octets form the System ID of the router that originated the LSP. The next octet is the pseudonode ID. When this byte is zero, the LSP describes links from the system. When it is nonzero, the LSP is a pseudonode LSP.
show isis database verbose Table 75 show isis database verbose Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Physical BW Link bandwidth capacity (in bits per second). Reservable BW Amount of reservable bandwidth on this link. BW Unreserved Amount of bandwidth that is available for reservation. The following example includes a route tag: Router# show isis database verbose IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database: LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime dasher.
show isis mpls ldp show isis mpls ldp To display synchronization and autoconfiguration information about interfaces belonging to Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) processes, use the show isis mpls ldp command in privileged EXEC mode. show isis [process-tag] mpls ldp [interface interface] Syntax Description process-tag (Optional) Process ID. Displays information only for the specified routing process.
show isis mpls ldp Table 76 show isis mpls ldp Field Descriptions Field Description AUTOCONFIG Information LDP enabled—Indicates whether LDP autoconfiguration is enabled on this interface. Value is YES or NO. SYNC Information Provides synchronization information. • Required—Indicates whether synchronization is required on the interface. • Achieved—Indicates whether synchronization was achieved with LDP.
show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log To display a log of 20 entries of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) adjacency changes, use the show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log Related Commands Command Description show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements Displays the last flooded record from MPLS traffic engineering.
show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements To display the last flooded record from Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering, use the show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.
show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements Table 78 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 78 Related Commands show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements Field Descriptions Field Description System ID Identification value for the local system in the area. Router ID MPLS traffic engineering router ID. Link Count Number of links that MPLS traffic engineering advertised. Neighbor System ID Identification value for the remote system in an area.
show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel To display information about tunnels considered in the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) next hop calculation, use the show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel command in privileged EXEC mode. show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.
show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng autoroute Displays tunnels that are announced to IGP, including interface, destination, and bandwidth.
show issu clients show issu clients To display a list of the current In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) clients—that is, the network applications and protocols supported by ISSU—use the show issu clients command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show issu clients Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was introduced. 12.
show issu clients Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID Client_ID = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1009, 1010, 1013, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2019,
show issu clients Table 80 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 80 show issu clients Field Descriptions Field Description Client_ID The identification number used by ISSU for that client. Client_Name A character string describing the client.
show issu entities show issu entities To display information about entities within one or more In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) clients, use the show issu entities command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show issu entities [client_id] Note An entity is a logical group of sessions that possess some common attributes. Syntax Description client_id Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was introduced. 12.
show issu entities Table 81 Related Commands show issu entities Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description MsgType Count The number of message types within the identified entity. MsgGroup Count The number of message groups within the identified entity. A message group is a list of message types. CapType Count The number of capability types within the identified entity. CapEntry Count The number of capability entries within the identified entity.
show issu message types show issu message types To display formats (“types”), versions, and maximum packet size of the In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) messages supported by a particular client, use the show issu message types command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show issu message types client-id Syntax Description client-id Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was introduced. 12.
show issu message types Table 82 show issu message types Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Message_Ver Message version. Because each client application contains one or more versions of its messages, ISSU needs to discover these versions and negotiate between the new and old system software which version to use in its preparatory communications. Message_Mtu Maximum size (in bytes) of the transmitted message.
show issu negotiated show issu negotiated To display details of the session’s negotiation about message version or client capabilities, use the show issu negotiated command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show issu negotiated {version | capability} session-id Syntax Description version Displays results of a negotiation about versions of the messages exchanged during the specified session, between the active and standby endpoints.
show issu negotiated Table 83 show issu negotiated version Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Negotiated_Version The message version that was decided upon, for use during the software upgrade process. Message_Mtu Maximum size (in bytes) of the transmitted message. A value of 0 means there is no restriction on size. In that case, fragmentation and reassembly are handled in a manner transparent to the ISSU infrastructure.
show issu sessions show issu sessions To display detailed information about a particular In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) client—including whether the client status for the impending software upgrade is compatible—use the show issu sessions command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show issu sessions client-id Syntax Description client-id Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was introduced. 12.
show issu sessions Table 85 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 85 show issu sessions Field Descriptions Field Description Client_ID The identification number used by ISSU for that client. Entity_ID The identification number used by ISSU for each entity within this client. Session_ID The identification number used by ISSU for this session. Session_Name A character string describing the session.
show issu sessions Related Commands Command Description show issu clients Lists the current ISSU clients—that is, the applications on this network supported by ISSU. show issu message types Displays the formats, versions, and maximum packet size of ISSU messages supported by a particular client. show issu negotiated Displays results of a negotiation that occurred concerning message versions or client capabilities.
show mpls atm-ldp bindings show mpls atm-ldp bindings Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display specified entries from the ATM label binding database, use the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command in privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls atm-ldp bindings Usage Guidelines Examples Release Modification 12.0(21)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)ST. 12.0(22)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(22)S. 12.0(23)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(23)S. 12.2(13)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(13)T. 12.2(14)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)S. 12.
show mpls atm-ldp bindings Table 86 describes the significant fields shown in the displays. Table 86 Related Commands show mpls atm-ldp bindings Field Descriptions Field Description Destination Destination (network/mask). Headend Router Indicates types of VCs. Options are the following: Tailend Router • Tailend—VC that terminates at this platform Tailend Switch • Headend—VC that originates at this router Transit • Transit—VC that passes through a switch ATM1/0.1 ATM interface.
show mpls atm-ldp bindwait show mpls atm-ldp bindwait Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls atm-ldp bindwait command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display the number of bindings waiting for label assignments from a remote Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM switch, use the show mpls atm-ldp bindwait command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls atm-ldp bindwait Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show mpls atm-ldp bindwait end If there are no bindings waiting for label assignments from the remote MPLS ATM switch, this command does not display any output. Related Commands Command Description show mpls atm-ldp bindings Displays specified entries from the ATM label binding database.
show mpls atm-ldp capability show mpls atm-ldp capability Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls atm-ldp capability command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM capabilities negotiated with Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) neighbors for label-controlled (LC)-ATM interfaces, use the show mpls atm-ldp capability command in privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls atm-ldp capability This command displays the MPLS ATM capabilities negotiated by LDP or the Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP). Note Examples TDP is not supported for LDP features in Cisco IOS 12.0(30)S and later releases, 12.2(27)SBC and later 12.2S releases, and 12.3(14)T and later releases.
show mpls atm-ldp capability Table 87 show mpls atm-ldp capability Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description VC Merge Indicates the type of virtual circuit (VC) merge support available on this interface. There are two possibilities, as follows: • IN—Indicates the input interface merge capability. IN accepts the following values: – EN—The hardware interface supports VC merge, and VC merge is enabled on the device.
sshow mpls atm-ldp summary sshow mpls atm-ldp summary Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls atm-ldp summary command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display summary information about all the entries in the ATM label binding database, use the show mpls atm-ldp summary command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls atm-ldp summary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 11.
sshow mpls atm-ldp summary ATM0/0/0 ATM0/0/1 406 406 406 406 404 3 2 403 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 88 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 88 Related Commands show mpls atm-ldp summary Field Descriptions Field Description Total number of destinations: Number of known destination address prefixes. interface Name of an interface with associated ATM label bindings. total Total number of ATM labels on this interface.
show mpls cos-map show mpls cos-map Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls cos-map command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display the quality of service (QoS) map used to assign a quantity of label virtual circuits and the associated class of service (CoS) for those virtual circuits, use the show mpls cos-map command in privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls cos-map Table 89 Related Commands show mpls cos-map Field Descriptions Field Description cos-map Configures a class map, which specifies how classes map to MPLS virtual circuits when they are combined with a prefix map. class The IP precedence. Label-VC An ATM virtual circuit that is set up through ATM label switch router (LSR) label distribution procedures.
show mpls flow mappings show mpls flow mappings To display all entries in the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Prefix/Application/Label (PAL) table, use the show mpls flow mappings command in user EXEC mode or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls flow mappings Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(28)SB This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls flow mappings Table 90 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 90 show mpls flow mappings Field Descriptions Field Description Label Value given to the MPLS label by the router. Owner MPLS application that allocated the label. • LDP = Label Distribution Protocol • BGP = Border Gateway Protocol • TE-MIDT = Traffic engineering tunnel midpoint Route-Distinguisher Value (8-byte) that is concatenated with an IPv4 prefix to create a unique VPN IPv4 prefix.
show mpls forwarding vrf show mpls forwarding vrf To display label forwarding information for advertised Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance routes, use the show mpls forwarding vrf command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable the display of label forwarding information, use the no form of this command.
show mpls forwarding vrf Examples The following example shows label forwarding entries that correspond to the VRF called vpn1: Router# show mpls forwarding vrf vpn1 detail Local tag 35 Outgoing Prefix Bytes tag Outgoing tag or VC or Tunnel Id switched interface 24 10.0.0.0/8[V] 0 Et0/0/4 10.0.0.
show mpls forwarding-table show mpls forwarding-table To display the contents of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Forwarding Information Base (LFIB), use the show mpls forwarding-table command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls forwarding-table [network {mask | length} | labels label [- label] | interface interface | next-hop address | lsp-tunnel [tunnel-id]] [vrf vrf-name] [detail] Syntax Description network (Optional) Destination network number.
show mpls forwarding-table Examples Release Modification 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.2(33)SXH The command output was modified for the Cisco IOS Software Modularity: MPLS Layer 3 VPNs feature to show the status of local labels in holdown. The status indicator showing that traffic is forwarded through an LSP tunnel is moved to the local label.
show mpls forwarding-table Router# show mpls forwarding-table detail Local Outgoing Prefix Bytes label Outgoing Next Hop label label or VC or Tunnel Id switched interface 16 Pop label 10.0.0.6/32 0 AT1/0.1 point2point Bundle adjacency exp(vcd) 0(1) 1(1) 2(1) 3(1) 4(1) 5(1) 6(1) 7(1) MAC/Encaps=12/12, MTU=4474, label Stack{} 00010000AAAA030000008847 No output feature configured 17 18 10.0.0.9/32 0 AT1/0.
show mpls forwarding-table Per-packet load-sharing, slots: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 No label 10.42.42.42/32[V] 4185 Et0/0/2 10.0.0.1 MAC/Encaps=0/0, MTU=1500, label Stack{} VPN route: vpn1 Feature Quick flag set Per-packet load-sharing, slots: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 19 2/33 10.41.41.41/32 0 AT1/0/0.
show mpls forwarding-table Table 91 describes the significant fields in the sample output. Table 91 show mpls forwarding-table Field Descriptions Field Description Local label Label assigned by this router. Outgoing Label or VC Note Label assigned by the next hop or Virtual Path Identifier (VPI)/ Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) used to get to next hop. The This field is not supported on entries in this column are the following: the Cisco 10000 series • [T]—Means forwarding through an LSP tunnel.
show mpls forwarding-table Explicit-Null Label Example The following example shows output, including the explicit-null label = 0 (commented in bold), from the show mpls forwarding-table command on a CSC-PE router: Router# show mpls forwarding-table Local label 17 18 19 20 21 22 Outgoing label or VC Pop label Pop label Aggregate Pop label Aggregate 0 23 0 25 0 value 0 Prefix Bytes label or Tunnel Id switched 10.10.0.0/32 0 10.10.10.0/24 0 10.10.20.0/24[V] 0 10.10.200.1/32[V] 0 10.10.1.1/32[V] 0 192.
show mpls forwarding-table Cisco IOS Software Modularity: MPLS Layer 3 VPNs Example The following is sample output from the show mpls forwarding-table command. Router# show mpls forwarding-table Local Label 16 17 [H] 18 19 [T] [HT] [H] 20 [H] 21 [H] 22 [H] 23 24 25 26 27 [HT] [HT] [H] [HT] [T] [H] Outgoing Label Pop Label No Label No Label No Label Pop Label No Label No Label No Label No Label No Label No Label No Label No Label 16 24 No Label 16 No Label Prefix or Tunnel Id IPv4 VRF[V] 10.1.
show mpls forwarding-table Related Commands Command Description neighbor send-label Enables a BGP router to send MPLS labels with BGP routes to a neighboring BGP router. neighbor send-label explicit-null Enables a BGP router to send MPLS labels with explicit-null information for a CSC-CE router and BGP routes to a neighboring CSC-PE router.
show mpls interfaces show mpls interfaces To display information about one or more or all interfaces that are configured for label switching, use the show mpls interfaces command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls interfaces [interface | vrf vpn-name] [all] [detail] [internal] Syntax Description interface (Optional) Defines the interface about which to display label switching information.
show mpls interfaces Usage Guidelines This command shows MPLS information about the specified interface, or about all the interfaces for which MPLS has been configured. If no optional keyword or argument is specified in this command, summary information is displayed for each interface configured for label switching. Examples The following is sample output from the show mpls interfaces command: Router# show mpls interfaces Interface Ethernet1/1/1 Ethernet1/1/2 Ethernet1/1/3 POS2/0/0 ATM0/0.1 ATM3/0.
show mpls interfaces The following is sample output from the show mpls interfaces command with the detail keyword: Router# show mpls interfaces detail Interface Ethernet1/1/1: IP labeling enabled (tdp) LSP Tunnel labeling not enabled MPLS operational MPLS turbo vector MTU = 1500 Interface POS2/0/0: IP labeling enabled (ldp) LSP Tunnel labeling not enabled MPLS not operational MPLS turbo vector MTU = 4470 Interface ATM3/0.
show mpls interfaces Table 95 show mpls interfaces detail Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description MTU The setting of the maximum transmission unit, in bytes. ATM labels: Label VPI The virtual path identifier (VPI). Note Label VCI range The range of values used in the VPI field for label VCs. Note Control VC This field does not apply to the Cisco 10000 series routers. This field does not apply to the Cisco 10000 series routers. The values assigned to the control VC.
show mpls interfaces The following is sample output from the show mpls interfaces command with the internal keyword. The output shows whether MPLS egress NetFlow accounting is enabled on the interface. If MPLS egress NetFlow accounting is disabled, the Output_feature_state field displays 0x0. If MPLS egress Netflow accounting is enabled, the Output_feature_state field is any number, except 0x0.
show mpls ip binding show mpls ip binding To display specified information about label bindings learned by the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), use the show mpls ip binding command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls ip binding remote-label label - label (Optional) Displays entries with remotely assigned labels learned from neighbor routers that match the specified label values. Use the label - label arguments and keyword to indicate the label range. The hyphen (-) keyword is required for a label range. interface interface (Optional) Displays label bindings associated with the specified interface (for label-controlled (LC)-ATM only).
show mpls ip binding Usage Guidelines Note The show mpls ip binding command displays label bindings learned by LDP or the Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP). TDP is not supported for LDP features in Cisco IOS 12.0(30)S and later releases, 12.2(27)SBC and later 12.2S releases, and 12.3(14)T and later releases. To summarize information about label bindings learned by LDP, use the show mpls ip binding summary command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls ip binding 192.168.0.66/32 in label: in vc label: out label: . . . 26 1/39 Active 16 lsr: 10.0.7.7:2 egress (vcd 58) lsr: 10.0.0.55:0 ATM1/0.8 inuse In the following example, a request is made for the display of the label binding information for prefix 192.168.44.0/24: Router# show mpls ip binding 192.168.44.0 24 192.168.44.0/24 in label: in vc label: out label: 24 1/37 Active imp-null lsr: 10.0.7.7:2 egress (vcd 56) lsr: 10.0.0.55:0 ATM1/0.
show mpls ip binding 10.30.7.0/16 in label: out label: 10.30.10.0/16 in label: out label: 10.30.13.0/16 in label: out label: 17 imp-null lsr:10.14.14.14:0 5016 269 lsr:10.14.14.14:0 76 imp-null lsr:10.14.14.14:0 The following sample output shows label binding information for all VRFs: Router# show mpls ip binding all 10.0.0.0/24 in label: out label: 10.11.0.0/24 in label: out label: 10.101.0.1/32 out label: 10.131.0.1/32 in label: out label: 10.134.0.1/32 in label: out label: VRF vrf1: 10.0.0.
show mpls ip binding 10.30.0.0/24 in label: out label: out label: 10.44.44.44/32 in label: out label: in label: out label: out label: 10.30.0.0/24 in label: out label: out label: 10.44.44.44/32 in label: out label: out label: 10.55.55.55/32 in label: out label: out label: 10.66.66.66/32 in label: out label: out label: 10.255.254.244/32 in label: out label: out label: imp-null imp-null 18 21 19 imp-null 26 imp-null lsr: 10.66.66.66:0 lsr: 10.44.44.44:0 lsr: 10.66.66.66:0 lsr: 10.66.66.66:0 lsr: 10.44.44.
show mpls ip binding Table 96 show mpls ip binding Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description out label Outgoing label. This is a remote label learned from an LDP neighbor. The neighbor is identified by its LDP ID in the lsr field. inuse Indicates that the outgoing label is in use for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwarding, that is, it is installed in the MPLS forwarding table (the Label Forwarding Information Base [LFIB]). in vc label Incoming MPLS ATM label.
show mpls ip binding Table 96 show mpls ip binding Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description vcd 49 Virtual circuit descriptor number for the LVC. Note ingress 3 hops This field applies to the Cisco 7500 series routers only. Indicates whether the LSR is an ingress, transit, or egress node for the destination. Note This field applies to the Cisco 7500 series routers only. Options include the following: • Ingress 3 hops.
show mpls ip binding Table 97 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 97 show mpls ip binding detail Field Descriptions Field Description chkpt The status of the checkpointed entry. owner • add-skipped—Means that the local label is a null label and does not need to be checkpointed. • added— Means that the checkpoints entry was copied to the backup Route Processor (RP) The application that created the binding. • owner LDP—Means that LDP created the binding.
show mpls ip binding Table 98 show mpls ip binding summary Field Descriptions (Cisco 7500 Series Example) assigned in labels Number of prefixes for which the LSR has assigned an incoming (local) label. learned out labels Number of prefixes for which the LSR has learned an outgoing (remote) label from an LDP neighbor. ATM label bindings summary Indicates the start of summary information for MPLS ATM label bindings. An ATM label is a VPI/VCI.
show mpls ip binding Table 99 Related Commands show mpls ip binding summary Field Descriptions (Cisco 10000 Series Example) Field Description assigned in labels Number of prefixes for which the LSR has assigned an incoming (local) label. learned out labels Number of prefixes for which the LSR has learned an outgoing (remote) label from an LDP neighbor. Command Description show mpls atm-ldp bindings Displays specified entries from the ATM label binding database.
show mpls ip iprm counters show mpls ip iprm counters To display the number of occurrences of various Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) IP Rewrite Manager (IPRM) events, use the show mpls ip iprm counters command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ip iprm counters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behaviors or values. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls ip iprm counters Table 100 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 100 show mpls ip iprm counters Command Field Descriptions Field Description CEF Tree Changes Processed/Ignored Processed—The number of Cisco Express Forwarding tree change announcements that IPRM processed. Ignored—The number of Cisco Express Forwarding tree change announcements that IPRM ignored. Typically, IPRM processes tree change announcements only for prefixes in a routing table.
show mpls ip iprm counters Table 100 show mpls ip iprm counters Command Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description CEF Tree Changes Processed/Ignored Processed—The number of Cisco Express Forwarding tree change announcements that IPRM processed. Ignored—The number of Cisco Express Forwarding tree change announcements that IPRM ignored. Typically, IPRM processes tree change announcements only for prefixes in a routing table.
show mpls ip iprm ldm show mpls ip iprm ldm To display information about the IP Label Distribution Modules (LDMs) that have registered with the IP Rewrite Manager (IPRM), use the show mpls ip iprm ldm command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ip iprm ldm [table {all | table-id} | vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 | ipv6] Cisco 10000 Series Routers show mpls ip iprm ldm [table {all | table-id} | vrf vrf-name] [ipv4] Syntax Description table (Optional) Displays the LDMs for one or more routing tables.
show mpls ip iprm ldm Examples The command in the following example displays the LDMs for the global routing tables. It shows that two LDMs (lcatm and ldp) are registered for the ipv4 global routing table, and that one LDM (bgp ipv6) is registered for the ipv6 global routing table. Router# show mpls ip iprm ldm table (glbl;ipv4); ldms: 2 lcatm, ldp table (glbl;ipv6); ldms: 1 bgp ipv6 The command in the following example displays all of the LDMs registered with IPRM.
show mpls ip iprm ldm Related Commands Command Description show mpls ip iprm counters Displays the number of occurrences of various IPRM events.
show mpls l2 vc detail show mpls l2 vc detail To display detailed information related to the virtual connection (VC), use the show mpls l2 vc detail command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls l2 vc vc-id detail Syntax Description vc-id Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(33)SRA This command was introduced. 12.2SX This command is supported in the Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX train. Support in a specific 12.
show mpls l2 vc detail Local intf ------------AT0/2/0.1 AT0/2/0.1 Local circuit -------------------------ATM VPC CELL 50 ATM VPC CELL 50 Dest address VC ID Status --------------- ---------- ---------10.1.1.2 100 UP 10.1.1.3 100 STANDBY The show mpls l2 vc detail command on the backup PE router displays the status of the pseudowires. The active pseudowire on the backup PE router has the HOTSTANDBY status. Router-standby# show mpls l2 vc detail Local intf ------------AT0/2/0.1 AT0/2/0.
show mpls l2transport binding show mpls l2transport binding To display virtual circuit (VC) label binding information, use the show mpls l2transport binding command in EXEC mode. show mpls l2transport binding [vc-id | ip-address | local-label number | remote-label number} Syntax Description vc-id (Optional) Displays VC label binding information for the specified VC. ip-address (Optional) Displays VC label binding information for the specified VC destination.
show mpls l2transport binding VCCV Capabilities: Type 1, Type 2 Remote Label: 16 Cbit: 1, VC Type: Ethernet, GroupID: 0 MTU: 1500, Interface Desc: n/a VCCV Capabilities: Type 1, Type 2 The following examples shows the VC label binding information for Cisco IOS Release 12.2(30)S and later releases: Router# show mpls l2transport binding Destination Address: 10.5.5.
show mpls l2transport binding MTU: 1500, Interface Desc: n/a VCCV: CC Type: RA [2] CV Type: LSPV [2] Destination Address: 10.76.1.1, VC ID: Local Label: 43 Cbit: 1, VC Type: Ethernet, MTU: 1500, Interface Desc: n/a VCCV: CC Type: CW [1], RA [2] CV Type: LSPV [2] Remote Label: 110 Cbit: 1, VC Type: Ethernet, MTU: 1500, Interface Desc: n/a VCCV: CC Type: RA [2] CV Type: LSPV [2] Destination Address: 10.76.1.
show mpls l2transport binding Table 101 show mpls l2transport binding Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description VCCV Capabilities (Cisco IOS Releases 12.0(27)S and 12.2(18)SXE and later releses) AToM VCCV information. This field displays how an AToM VCCV packet is identified. VCCV: CC Type CV Type • Type 1—The Protocol ID field of the AToM Control Word (CW) is identified in the AToM VCCV packet.
show mpls l2transport binding The following sample output shows information about L2VPN multisegment pseudowires (in bold): Router# show mpls l2transport binding Destination Address: 10.1.1.
show mpls l2transport binding Differential Timestamp Mode: disabled Clock Frequency (kHz): 64 Synchronization Source id: 0 The following example shows the VC label binding information for the control word, which in this case is set to 0, meaning that it is disabled: Router# show mpls l2transport binding 102 Destination Address: 10.1.1.
show mpls l2transport checkpoint show mpls l2transport checkpoint To display checkpointing information about Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) virtual circuits (VCs), use the show mpls l2transport checkpoint command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls l2transport checkpoint Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls l2transport hw-capability show mpls l2transport hw-capability To display the transport types supported on an interface, use the show mpls l2transport hw-capability command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls l2transport hw-capability interface type number Syntax Description interface Displays information for the specified interface. type number Type and number of the interface. For example, serial6/0. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls l2transport hw-capability . Note These examples show only a portion of the output. The command displays the the capabilities of every transport type. The following is partial sample output of the show mpls l2transport hw-capability command for Cisco IOS Releases 12.0(27)S and 12.2(18)SXE and later releases. This output shows VCCV data under the Core Functionality section. Type 1 means that the AToM Control Word identified the AToM VCCV packet. For more information on the fields, see Table 103.
show mpls l2transport hw-capability Transport type DOCSIS VLAN Core functionality: MPLS label disposition supported Control word processing supported Sequence number processing not supported VCCV CC Type CW [1] processing not supported Edge functionality: Not supported The output of the command changed between Cisco IOS releases. The following table maps the older output to the newer output: Output in Cisco IOS Releases 12.0(27)S and 12.2(18)SXE and later Output In Cisco IOS Release 12.
show mpls l2transport summary show mpls l2transport summary To display summary information about virtual circuits (VCs) that have been enabled to route Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) Layer 2 packets on a router, use the show mpls l2transport summary command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls l2transport summary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(23)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls l2transport summary Table 104 describes the fields shown in the show mpls l2transport summary command display. Table 104 show mpls l2transport summary Field Descriptions Field Description Destination address IP address of the remote router to which the VC has been established. Related Commands Total number of VCs Number of VCs that have been established. unknown Number of VCs that are in an unknown state. up Number of VCs that are operational.
show mpls l2transport vc show mpls l2transport vc To display information about Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) virtual circuits (VCs) and static pseudowires that have been enabled to route Layer 2 packets on a router, use the show mpls l2transport vc command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls l2transport vc Release Modification 12.0(22)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(22)S and implemented on the Cisco 10720 router. 12.0(23)S This command was modified. The interface and destination keywords were added. 12.2(14)SX This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)SX and was implemented on the Supervisor Engine 720. 12.2(14)SZ This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)SZ. 12.
show mpls l2transport vc The following sample output shows information about the interfaces and VCs that have been configured to transport various Layer 2 packets on the router: Router# show mpls l2transport vc Local intf ------------Se5/0 AT4/0 AT4/0 AT4/0.300 Local circuit -----------------FR DLCI 55 ATM AAL5 0/100 ATM AAL5 0/200 ATM AAL5 0/300 Dest address --------------10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.
show mpls l2transport vc The following example shows information about the NSF, SSO, and graceful restart capability. The SSO portion indicates when checkpointing data has either been sent (on active) or received (on standby). When SSO data has not been successfully sent or has been released, the SSO information is not shown. Router# show mpls l2transport vc detail Local interface: Fa5/1/1.2 down, line protocol down, Eth VLAN 2 up Destination address: 10.55.55.
show mpls l2transport vc Router# show mpls l2transport vc detail Local interface: Et1/0 up, line protocol up, Ethernet up . . . VC statistics: transit packet totals: receive 219, send 220 transit byte totals: receive 20896, send 26694 transit packet drops: receive 0, send 0 Table 106 describes the significant fields shown in the displays.
show mpls l2transport vc Table 106 show mpls l2transport vc detail Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Tunnel label An IGP label used to route the packet over the MPLS backbone to the destination router with the egress interface. The first part of the output displays the type of label. The second part of the output displays the route information.
show mpls l2transport vc Table 106 Field show mpls l2transport vc detail Field Descriptions (continued) Description SSM segment/switch IDs The IDs used to refer to the control plane and data plane for this VC. This data is not for customer use but for Cisco personnel for troubleshooting purposes. When the Source Specific Multicast (SSM) IDs are followed by the word “used,” the checkpointed data has been successfully sent and not released.
show mpls l2transport vc Table 107 describes the fields shown in the display. Table 107 show mpls l2transport vc detail Field Descriptions for VPLS Autodiscovery Field Description Next hop PE address The IP address of the next hop router. AGI The attachment group identifier (AGI). Local AII The attachment individual identifier (AII). The local IP address used for signaling. Remote AII The remote IP address used for signaling.
show mpls l2transport vc Default path: active Next hop: 10.0.0.1 Create time: 00:39:30, last status change time: 00:26:48 Signaling protocol: LDP, peer 10.1.1.1:0 up Targeted Hello: 10.1.1.2(LDP Id) -> 10.1.1.
show mpls l2transport vc Table 108 show mpls l2transport vc detail Field Descriptions for the MPLS Pseudowire Signaling Status Feature Field Description Last local LDP TLV status sent The last status message sent about the Type, Length, Value (TLV) on the local router. Last remote LDP TLV status rcvd The last status message received about the TLV on the local router.
show mpls l2transport vc The following example shows sample output from the show mpls l2 transport vc command to display the status of the control word when it is not configured; that is, it defaults to autosense. Router# show mpls l2transport vc 123400 detail Local interface: Et0/0 up, line protocol up, Ethernet up Destination address: 10.1.1.
show mpls label range show mpls label range To display the range of local labels available for use on packet interfaces, use the show mpls label range command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls label range Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(9)ST This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
show mpls ldp backoff show mpls ldp backoff To display information about the configured session setup backoff parameters and any potential Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) peers with which session setup attempts are being throttled, use the show mpls ldp backoff command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls ldp backoff Examples The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp backoff command: Router# show mpls ldp backoff LDP initial/maximum backoff: 30/240 sec Backoff table: 2 entries LDP Id Backoff(sec) Waiting(sec) 10.144.0.44:0 60 30 10.155.0.55:0 120 90 Table 110 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show mpls ldp backoff Related Commands Command Description mpls ldp backoff Configures session setup delay parameters for the LDP backoff mechanism.
show mpls ldp bindings show mpls ldp bindings To display the contents of the Label Information Base (LIB), use the show mpls ldp bindings command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls ldp bindings Usage Guidelines Note Release Modification 12.2(4)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(4)T. 12.2(8)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(8)T. 12.0(21)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)ST. 12.0(22)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(22)S. 12.0(23)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(23)S. 12.2(13)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(13)T.
show mpls ldp bindings remote binding: lsr: 10.0.0.55:0, label: imp-null remote binding: lsr: 10.66.0.66:0, label: 16 remote binding: lsr: 10.0.0.44:0, label: imp-null 192.168.0.66/32, rev 19 local binding: label: 20 remote binding: lsr: 10.0.0.55:0, label: 19 remote binding: lsr: 10.66.0.66:0, label: imp-null remote binding: lsr: 10.0.0.44:0, label: 18 . . .
show mpls ldp bindings 10.30.5.0/16, rev 1429 local binding: label:20715 remote binding:lsr:10.14.14.14:0, label:504 10.30.7.0/16, rev 4 local binding: label:17 remote binding:lsr:10.14.14.14:0, label:imp-null 10.30.10.0/16, rev 422 local binding: label:5016 remote binding:lsr:10.14.14.14:0, label:269 . . . The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp bindings all command, which displays the label bindings for all VRFs: Router# show mpls ldp bindings all lib entry: 10.0.0.
show mpls ldp bindings 10.20.20.20:0 10.25.25.25:0 remote binding: lsr: 10.20.20.20:0, label: remote binding: lsr: 10.25.25.25:0, label: lib entry: 10.13.2.0/24, rev 6, local binding: label: imp-null Advertised to: 10.20.20.20:0 10.25.25.25:0 remote binding: lsr: 10.20.20.20:0, label: remote binding: lsr: 10.25.25.25:0, label: lib entry: 10.6.1.0/24, rev 22, local binding: label: 21 Advertised to: 10.20.20.20:0 10.25.25.25:0 remote binding: lsr: 10.20.20.20:0, label: remote binding: lsr: 10.25.25.
show mpls ldp bindings Related Commandst Command Description show mpls ip binding Displays specified information about label bindings learned by the MPLS LDP. show mpls ldp neighbor Displays the status of LDP sessions.
show mpls ldp checkpoint show mpls ldp checkpoint To display information about the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) checkpoint system on the active route processor, use the show mpls ldp checkpoint command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp checkpoint Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls ldp checkpoint Table 112 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 112 show mpls ldp checkpoint Field Descriptions Field Description Checkpoint status The status of the checkpointing system. If the status shows dynamic-sync or another enabled state, then the checkpointing system is enabled. If the status shows disabled, then the checkpointing system is disabled. Related Commands Checkpoint resend timer The status of the resend timer.
show mpls ldp discovery show mpls ldp discovery To display the status of the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) discovery process, use the show mpls ldp discovery command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp discovery [vrf vrf-name | all] [detail] Syntax Description vrf vrf-name (Optional) Displays the neighbor discovery information for the specified Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.
show mpls ldp discovery Release Modification 12.2SX This command is supported in the Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX train. Support in a specific 12.2SX release of this train depends on your feature set, platform, and platform hardware. 12.0(33)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(33)S and LDP MD5 password rollover information displays in the command output when the detail argument is used with the show mpls ldp discovery command.
show mpls ldp discovery VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF VRF Discovery Sources: Interfaces: ATM3/0/0.2 (ldp):xmit/recv LDP Id:10.14.14.14:0 vpn3:Local LDP Identifier: 172.30.15.2:0 Discovery Sources: Interfaces: ATM3/0/0.3 (ldp):xmit/recv LDP Id:10.14.14.14:0 vpn4:Local LDP Identifier: 172.30.17.2:0 Discovery Sources: Interfaces: ATM3/0/0.4 (ldp):xmit/recv LDP Id:10.14.14.14:0 vpn5:Local LDP Identifier: 172.30.19.2:0 Discovery Sources: Interfaces: ATM3/0/0.5 (ldp):xmit/recv LDP Id:10.14.14.
show mpls ldp discovery Interfaces: ATM3/0/0.12 (ldp):xmit/recv LDP Id:10.14.14.14:0 VRF vpn13:Local LDP Identifier: Router# Table 113 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 113 show mpls ldp discovery Field Descriptions Field Description Local LDP Identifier The LDP identifier for the local router. An LDP identifier is 6-bytes displayed in the form “IP address:number.
show mpls ldp discovery LDP Id: 10.10.10.10:0 Src IP addr: 172.140.0.1; Transport IP addr: 10.10.10.10 Hold time: 15 sec; Proposed local/peer: 15/15 sec Table 114 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 114 show mpls ldp discovery detail Field Descriptions Field Description Local LDP Identifier The LDP identifier for the local router. An LDP identifier is a 6-byte construct displayed in the form “IP address:number.
show mpls ldp discovery The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp discovery detail command, which displays information related to LDP MD5 passwords. Information related to MD5 passwords is pointed out in bold text in the output. Router# show mpls ldp discovery detail Local LDP Identifier: 10.10.10.10:0 Discovery Sources: Interfaces: Ethernet1/0 (ldp): xmit/recv Hello interval: 5000 ms; Transport IP addr: 10.10.10.10 LDP Id: 10.4.4.4:0 Src IP addr: 10.0.20.4; Transport IP addr: 10.4.4.
show mpls ldp discovery Command Description mpls ldp password required Specifies that LDP must use a password when establishing a session between LDP peers. mpls ldp password rollover duration Configures the duration before the new password takes effect on an MPLS label switch router (LSR). show mpls interfaces Displays information about one or more interfaces that have been configured for label switching. show mpls ldp neighbor Displays the status of LDP sessions.
show mpls ldp graceful-restart show mpls ldp graceful-restart To display a summary of the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Graceful Restart status, use the show mpls ldp graceful-restart command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp graceful-restart Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(29)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls ldp graceful-restart Table 115 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 115 Related Commands show mpls ldp graceful-restart Field Descriptions Field Description Neighbor Liveness Timer The number of seconds the neighbor liveness timer is set for. Max Recovery Time The number of seconds the maximum recovery timer is set for. Down Neighbor Database Information about the down (failed or restarting) LDP neighbor.
show mpls ldp igp sync show mpls ldp igp sync To display the status of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)-Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) synchronization process, use the show mpls ldp igp sync command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp igp sync [all | interface type number | vrf vpn-name] Syntax Description all (Optional) Display IGP SYNC information in all VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instances.
show mpls ldp igp sync Table 116 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 116 show mpls ldp igp sync Field Descriptions Field Description Ethernet0/0 Interface name and type. LDP configured Label Distribution Protocol is configured. SYNC enabled Synchronization is active. SYNC status Synchronization is successful. Peer reachable is an LDP internal state used only for MPLS LDP synchronization.
show mpls ldp neighbor show mpls ldp neighbor To display the status of Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions, use the show mpls ldp neighbor command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vrf-name | all] [address | interface] [detail] [graceful-restart] Syntax Description vrf vrf-name (Optional) Displays the LDP neighbors for the specified Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.
show mpls ldp neighbor Usage Guidelines Note Examples Release Modification 12.2(28)SB The detail keyword was updated to include Message Digest 5 (MD5) password information and the command was implemented on the Cisco 10000 series routers. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.2(33)SXH This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXH. 12.0(33)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(33)S. 12.
show mpls ldp neighbor Addresses bound to peer LDP Ident: 10.0.0.29 10.1.1.1 10.0.0.199 10.10.1.1 10.205.0.9 Duplicate Addresses advertised by peer: 10.10.8.111 The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp neighbor vrf vpn10 command, which displays the LDP neighbor information for the specified VPN routing and forwarding instance named vpn10: Router# show mpls ldp neighbor vrf vpn10 Peer LDP Ident:10.14.14.14:0; Local LDP Ident 10.29.0.2:0 TCP connection:10.14.14.14.646 - 10.29.0.2.
show mpls ldp neighbor The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp neighbor all command, which displays the LDP neighbor information for all VPN routing and forwarding instances, including those in the default routing domain. In this example, note that the same neighbor LDP ID (10.14.14.14) appears in all the listed VRF interfaces, highlighting the fact that the same IP address can coexist in different VPN routing and forwarding instances. Router# show mpls ldp neighbor all Peer TDP Ident:10.11.
show mpls ldp neighbor State:Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd:1069/800; Downstream Up time:02:38:52 LDP discovery sources: ATM3/0/0.3 Addresses bound to peer LDP Ident: 10.3.36.9 10.17.0.1 10.14.14.14 10.13.0.1 10.15.0.1 10.17.0.1 10.19.0.1 10.21.0.1 10.23.0.1 10.25.0.1 10.27.0.1 10.29.0.1 10.31.0.1 10.33.0.1 10.35.0.1 10.37.0.1 10.39.0.1 10.41.0.1 10.43.0.1 10.45.0.1 10.47.0.1 10.49.0.1 10.51.0.1 10.53.0.1 10.55.0.1 10.57.0.1 10.59.0.1 10.61.0.1 10.63.0.1 10.65.0.1 10.67.0.1 10.69.0.1 10.71.0.1 10.73.0.1 10.75.0.
show mpls ldp neighbor Addresses bound to peer LDP Ident: 10.0.40.4 10.4.4.4 10.0.20.4 Peer holdtime: 180000 ms; KA interval: 60000 ms; Peer state: estab Table 117 describes the significant fields shown in the displays. Table 117 show mpls ldp neighbor Field Descriptions Field Description Peer LDP Ident LDP (or TDP) identifier of the neighbor (peer) for this session. Local LDP Ident LDP (or TDP) identifier for the local label switch router (LSR) for this session.
show mpls ldp neighbor Table 117 Related Commands show mpls ldp neighbor Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Targeted Hello Lists the platforms to which targeted hello messages are being sent: • The active field indicates that this LSR has initiated targeted hello messages. • The passive field indicates that the neighbor LSR has initiated targeted hello messages and that this LSR is configured to respond to the targeted hello messages from the neighbor.
show mpls ldp neighbor password show mpls ldp neighbor password To display password information used in established Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions, use the show mpls ldp neighbor password command in user EXEC mode or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vrf-name] [ip-address | interface] password [pending | current] [all] Syntax Description vrf vrf-name (Optional) Displays the LDP neighbors for the specified Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.
show mpls ldp neighbor password Examples The following is sample output from the show mpls ldp neighbor password command, which displays information for all established LDP sessions: Router# show mpls ldp neighbor password Peer LDP Ident: 10.4.4.4:0; Local LDP Ident 10.1.1.1:0 TCP connection: 10.4.4.4.11017 - 10.10.01.10.646 Password: not required, none, stale State: Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd: 57/57 Peer LDP Ident: 10.3.3.3:0; Local LDP Ident 10.1.1.1:0 TCP connection: 10.3.3.3.11018 - 10.1.1.1.
show mpls ldp neighbor password Table 118 Related Commands show mpls ldp neighbor password Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Password Indicates the password source and status. • Required or not required indicates whether password configuration is required or not. • Neighbor, none, option #, or fallback indicates the password source when the password was configured. None indicates that no password was configured.
show mpls ldp parameters show mpls ldp parameters To display current Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) parameters, use the show mpls ldp parameters command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls ldp parameters Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 11.1CT This command was introduced. 12.0(10)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.
show mpls ldp parameters Table 119 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 119 show mpls ldp parameters Field Descriptions Field Description Protocol version Indicates the version of LDP running on the platform. Downstream label pool Describes the range of labels available for the platform to assign for label switching purposes.
show mpls oam echo statistics show mpls oam echo statistics To display statistics about Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) echo request packets, use the show mpls oam echo statistics command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls oam echo statistics [summary] Syntax Description summary Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.4(6)T This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls oam echo statistics M—Malformed echo request (1) - 0 N—No label entry (11) - 0 p—Premature termination of link-state packet (LSP) (13) - 0 P—No receive interface label protocol (12) - 0 U—Reserved (7) - 0 x—No return code (0) - 0 X—Undefined return code - 0 Echo Requests: sent (5)/received (0)/timedout (0)/unsent (0) Echo Replies: sent (0)/received (5)/unsent (0) The following example displays sample output when the summary keyword is specified: Router# show mpls oam echo statistics summary Cisc
show mpls platform show mpls platform To display platform-specific information, use the show mpls platform command in EXEC mode. show mpls platform {common | eompls | gbte-tunnels | reserved-vlans vlan vlan-id | statistics [reset] | vpn-vlan-mapping} Syntax Description common Displays the counters for shared code between the LAN and WAN interfaces. eompls Displays information about the Ethernet over Multiprotocol Label Switching (EoMPLS)-enabled interface.
show mpls platform This example shows how to display the EoMPLS-enabled interface information: Router# show mpls platform eompls Interface GigabitEthernet FastEthernet6/1 Router# VLAN 101 2022 This example shows how to display the GBTE-tunnels information: Router# show mpls platform gbte-tunnels To Router# From InLbl I/I/F kbps Kbits H/W Info This example shows how to display the RP-reserved VLAN show commands: Router# show mpls platform reserved-vlans vlan 1005 Note This example shows the output
show mpls platform psb search failures GB TE tunnel deleton w/o gb_flow errors finding slot number Router# 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 This example shows how to reset the RP-control plane statistics counters: Router# show mpls platform statistics reset Resetting Const RP MPLS control plane software statistics ...
show mpls prefix-map show mpls prefix-map Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show mpls prefix-map command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display the prefix map used to assign a quality of service (QoS) map to network prefixes that match a standard IP access list, use the show mpls prefix-map command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls prefix-map [prefix-map] Syntax Description prefix-map Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls prefix-map Related Commands Command Description mpls prefix-map Configures a router to use a specified QoS map when a label destination prefix matches the specified access-list.
show mpls static binding ipv4 show mpls static binding ipv4 To display Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) static label bindings, use the show mpls static binding ipv4 command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls static binding ipv4 [prefix {mask-length | mask} | nexthop address] [local | remote [nexthop address]] Syntax Description prefix {mask-length | mask} (Optional) The labels for a specific prefix. nexthop address (Optional) Specifies the labels for a next hop address.
show mpls static binding ipv4 10.66.0.0/16: Incoming label: 17 (in LIB) Outgoing labels: None In the following output, the show mpls static binding ipv4 command displays remote (outgoing) statically assigned labels only: Router# show mpls static binding ipv4 remote 10.0.0.0/8: Outgoing labels: 10.13.0.8 10.0.0.0/8: Outgoing labels: 10.0.0.
show mpls static binding ipv4 vrf show mpls static binding ipv4 vrf To display configured Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) virtual routing and forwarding (VRF)-aware static bindings, use the show mpls static binding ipv4 vrf command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls static binding ipv4 vrf vpn-name [prefix {mask-length | mask} | nexthop address] [local | remote [nexthop address]] Syntax Description vpn-name The static label bindings for the specified VPN routing and forwarding instance.
show mpls static crossconnect show mpls static crossconnect To display statically configured Label Forwarding Information Database (LFIB) entries, use the show mpls static crossconnect command in privileged EXEC mode. show mpls static crossconnect [low label [high label]] Syntax Description low label high label Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(23)S This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
show mpls traffic tunnel backup show mpls traffic tunnel backup To display information about the backup tunnels that are currently configured, use the show mpls traffic tunnel backup command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic tunnel backup tunneltunnel-id Syntax Description tunneltunnel-id Command Default Information about currently configured backup tunnels is not displayed. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls traffic tunnel backup Table 123 Related Commands show mpls traffic tunnel backup Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description num_lsps Number of label-switched paths (LSPs) being protected. protects The protected interfaces that are using this backup tunnel. Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-bw Specifies what types of LSPs can use a backup tunnel, whether the backup tunnel should provide bandwidth protection, and if so, how much.
show mpls traffic-eng autoroute show mpls traffic-eng autoroute To display tunnels announced to the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), including interface, destination, and bandwidth, use the show mpls traffic-eng autoroute command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng autoroute Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls traffic-eng autoroute Table 124 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng autoroute Field Descriptions Field Description MPLS TE autorouting enabled IGP automatically routes traffic into tunnels. destination MPLS traffic engineering tailend router system ID. traffic share A factor based on bandwidth, indicating how much traffic this tunnel should carry, relative to other tunnels, to the same destination.
show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh To display the cloned mesh tunnel interfaces of each autotemplate interface and the current range of mesh tunnel interface numbers, use the show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh command in user EXEC mode or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC (>) Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Table 125 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Interface Mesh tunnel interfaces cloned from access list 1. min 64336 max 65337 Range of mesh tunnel interface numbers for this Auto-Template1—minimum (64336) and maximum (65337). Command Description interface auto-template Creates the template interface.
show mpls traffic-eng destination list show mpls traffic-eng destination list To display an Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-multipoint (P2MP) destination list, use the show mpls traffic-eng destination list command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC configuration mode.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database To display the contents of the Fast Reroute (FRR) database, use the show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database Command Default The contents of the FRR database are not displayed. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(10)ST This command was introduced. 12.2(18)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)S. 12.2(18)SXD This command was implemented on the Catalyst 6000 series with the SUP720 processor. Examples 12.2(28)SB This command was implemented on the Cisco 10000(PRE-2) router. 12.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database Table 127 show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Out intf/label Out interface—short name of the physical interface through which traffic goes to the protected link. Out label: • At a tunnel head, this is the label advertised by the tunnel destination device. The value “Untagged” occurs when no such label has been advertised.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database Input label Tun hd, Output label PO0/0:774, FRR label Tu4000:774 Table 128 describes the significant fields when the detail keyword is used. Table 128 show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database with detail Keyword Field Descriptions Field Description Total Clusters A cluster is the physical interface upon which Fast Reroute link protection has been enabled.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database P2MP Sub-LSP FRR information: Sub-LSP identifier src_lspid[subid]->dst_tunid In-label Out intf/label ---------------------------------- -------------10.1.1..201_1[1]->10.1.1..203_22 Tun hd Et0/0:20 10.1.1..201_1[2]->10.1.1..206_22 Tun hd Et0/0:20 10.1.1..201_1[3]->10.1.1..213_22 Tun hd Et0/0:20 FRR intf/label -------------Tu666:20 Tu666:20 Tu666:20 Status -----ready ready ready Table 129 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes To display the contents of the Fast Reroute event log, use the show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes command in user EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults No default behavior or values. Command Modes user EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(10)ST This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes Table 130 show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Suspends Number of times that reroute processing for this event was interrupted to let the CPU handle other tasks. Errors Number of unsuccessful reroute attempts.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency To display traffic engineering (TE) tunnels that are advertised as links in an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) network, use the show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency [ip-address] Syntax Description ip-address Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Related Commands Command Description debug mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Displays debug messages for traffic engineering forwarding adjacency events. tunnel mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Advertises a TE tunnel as a link in an IGP network.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set To display the sublabel switched paths (sub-LSPs) that originate from the headend router, use the show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set [brief | detail] Syntax Description brief (Optional) Displays information about the sub-LSPs in a table format. detail (Optional) Displays detailed information about the sub-LSPs.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set FRR OutLabel : Tunnel666, 16 LSP: Source: 10.1.0.1, TunID: 100, LSPID: 7 Destination: 10.3.0.1, P2MP Subgroup ID: 2 Path Set ID: 0x30000001 OutLabel : Serial2/0, 16 Next Hop : 10.1.3.2 FRR OutLabel : Tunnel666, 16 Table 131 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 131 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng forwarding path-set Field Descriptions Field Description ID Path set ID.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics To display information about Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-pultipoint (P2MP) paths and sublabel switched paths (sub-LSPs), use the show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics Table 132 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng forwarding statistics Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description PSI Nodes Allocated Number of path set nodes allocated. PSI Nodes Freed Number of path set nodes freed Add sub-LSP to Path Set Number of sub-LSPs in the path set. Delete sub-LSP from Path Set Number of sub-LSPs removed from the path set, either by pruning or flushing. Update Path for FRR Number of paths updated for fast reroute.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control To show which tunnels were admitted locally and their parameters (such as, priority, bandwidth, incoming and outgoing interface, and state), use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control Table 133 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control Field Descriptions Field Description UP IF Upstream interface that the tunnel used. DOWN IF Downstream interface that the tunnel used. PRIORITY Setup priority of the tunnel followed by the hold priority. STATE Admission status of the tunnel. BW (kbps) Bandwidth of the tunnel (in kBps). If an “R” follows the bandwidth number, the bandwidth is reserved.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements To display local link information that Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering link management is flooding into the global traffic engineering topology, use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Reservable Bandwidth[6]: Reservable Bandwidth[7]: Attribute Flags: 0x00000000 2000 kbits/sec 2000 kbits/sec Table 134 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 134 show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Field Descriptions Field Description Flooding Status Status of the link management flooding system. Configured Areas Number of the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) areas configured.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Displays current local link information. show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors Displays IGP neighbors. show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces Displays per-interface resource and configuration information. show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary Displays a summary of link management information.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation To display current local link information, use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation [interface-name | summary [interface-name]] Syntax Description interface-name (Optional) Displays only tunnels that were admitted on the specified interface.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Admin.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Et0/0 Et1/0 47000 7500 42500 7500 42000 0 40500 0 Table 137 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 137 show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation summary Field Descriptions Field Description interface Name of the interface. Intf Max Maximum amount of bandwidth (in kbps) available on the interface. Intf Avail Amount of bandwidth (in kbps) currently available on the interface.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Table 138 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation summary Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description BC0 Avail Amount of bandwidth (in kbps) currently available in the global pool. BC1 Max Maximum amount of bandwidth (in kbps) available in the subpool. BC1 Avail Amount of bandwidth (in kbps) currently available in the subpool.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors To show Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) neighbors, use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors [igp-id [isis isis-address | ospf ospf-id] | ip A.B.C.D] Syntax Description igp-id (Optional) Displays the IGP neighbors that are using a specified IGP identification.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management igp-neighbors Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng link-management advertisements Displays local link information currently being flooded by MPLS traffic engineering link management into the global traffic engineering topology. show mpls traffic-eng link-management bandwidth-allocation Displays current local link information. show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces Displays per-interface resource and configuration information.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces To display interface resource and configuration information, use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces [interface-name] Syntax Description interface-name Command Modes User EXEC (>) Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces The following is sample output from the show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces command when SRLGs are configured: Router# show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces pos3/1 System Information:: Links Count: 11 Link ID:: PO3/1 (10.0.0.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management interfaces Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng link-management Displays local link information being flooded by MPLS advertisements traffic engineering link management into the global traffic engineering topology. show mpls traffic-eng link-management Displays current local link information. bandwidth-allocation show mpls traffic-eng link-management Displays IGP neighbors.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary To display a summary of link management information, use the show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary [interface-name] Syntax Description interface-name Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.1(3)T The command output was modified.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary Inbound Admission: Outbound Admission: Admin. Weight: IGP Neighbor Count: allow-all allow-if-room 10 (IGP) 0 Table 141 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 141 show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary Field Descriptions Field Description Links Count Number of links configured for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering. Flooding System Enable status of the MPLS traffic engineering flooding system.
show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary Table 142 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 142 show mpls traffic-eng link-management summary Field Descriptions Field Description Links Count Number of links configured for MPLS traffic engineering. Flooding System Status of the MPLS traffic engineering flooding system. The notation (IGP recovering) indicates that status cannot be determined because an IP routing process restart is in progress.
show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes To display global label switched path (LSP) attribute lists, use the show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes [name string] [internal] Syntax Description name (Optional) Identifies a specific LSP attribute list. string Describes the string argument. internal (Optional) Displays LSP atrribute list internal information.
show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Table 143 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Field Descriptions Field Description LIST Identifies the LSP attribute list. affinity Indicates the LSP attribute that specifies attribute flags for LSP links. Values are 0 or 1. mask Indicates which attribute values should be checked. auto-bw collect-bw Indicates automatic bandwidth configuration. protection fast re-route bw-protect Indicates that the failure protection is enabled.
show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting To display the status of IP routing and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering synchronization after an IP routing process restart, use the show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting Table 144 describes the normal output of the significant fields shown in the display. You should contact your technical support representative if your display has values other than those described in the table. Table 144 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng process-restart iprouting Field Descriptions Field Description Current State This indicates the restart status.
show mpls traffic-eng topology show mpls traffic-eng topology To display the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering global topology as currently known at the node, use the show mpls traffic-eng topology command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls traffic-eng topology Examples Release Modification 12.2(33)SRA This command was modified and integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. The srlg keyword was added. 12.2SX This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX. Support in a specific 12.2SX release of this train depends on your feature set, platform, and platform hardware. The following example shows output from the show mpls traffic-eng topology command: Router# show mpls traffic-eng topology My_System_id: 0000.0000.
show mpls traffic-eng topology Table 145 describes significant fields shown in the display. Table 145 show mpls traffic-eng topology Field Descriptions Field Description My_System_id Unique identifier of the IGP. My_BC_Model_Type: MAM Bandwidth constraints model of the local node: either Maximum Allocation Model (MAM) or Russian Dolls Model (RDM). Related Commands Signalling error holddown: Link hold-down timer configured to handle path error events to exclude link from topology.
show mpls traffic-eng topology path show mpls traffic-eng topology path To show the properties of the best available path to a specified destination that satisfies certain constraints, use the show mpls traffic-eng topology path command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls traffic-eng topology path Examples The following is sample output from the show mpls traffic-eng topology path command: Router # show mpls traffic-eng topology path Tunnel1 bandwidth 1000 Query Parameters: Destination:10.112.0.12 Bandwidth:1000 Priorities:1 (setup), 1 (hold) Affinity:0x0 (value), 0xFFFF (mask) Query Results: Min Bandwidth Along Path:2000 (kbps) Max Bandwidth Along Path:5000 (kbps) Hop 0:10.1.0.6 :affinity 00000000, bandwidth 2000 (kbps) Hop 1:10.1.0.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels show mpls traffic-eng tunnels To display information about tunnels, use the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels head Displays tunnels with their head at this router. middle Displays tunnels with a midpoint at this router. remote Displays tunnels with their head at some other router; this is a combination of middle and tail. tail Displays tunnels with a tail at this router. source-id (Optional) Restricts the display to tunnels with a matching source IP address or tunnel number. ipaddress Source IP address. tunnel-id Tunnel number. The range is from 0 to 65535.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Release Modification 12.2(18)S The following keywords were added: accounting, attributes, name-regexp, and property auto-tunnel. The property backup keyword was changed to property backup-tunnel. 12.2(18)SXD1 This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)SXD1. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRE and later releases, P2P and P2MP MPLS TE tunnels display “reroute pending” during reoptimization until the new path is used for forwarding. The “reroute pending” status is not displayed during the delayed clean operation. There is no change to data forwarding or tunnel creation. You might see the “reroute pending” status for a shorter time.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels MPLS Traffic Engineering Fast Reroute Examples The following is sample output from the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels property fast-reroute brief command. It displays brief information about all MPLS TE tunnels acting as Fast Reroute backup tunnels (property backup-tunnel) for interfaces on the router.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Backup Tu5711 to LSP nhop Tu5711: out i/f: PO1/1, label: implicit-null LSP signalling info: Original: out i/f: PO1/0, label: 12304, nhop: 10.1.1.7 With FRR: out i/f: Tu5711, label: 12304 LSP bw: 6000 kbps, Backup level: any unlimited, type: any pool Router_t2 LSP Head, Tunnel2, Admin: up, Oper: up Src 10.55.55.55, Dest 10.88.88.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Router# show mpls traffic-eng tunnels accounting Tunnel1 (Destination 10.103.103.103; 5 minute output rate 0 kbits/sec, 0 Tunnel2 (Destination 10.103.103.103; 5 minute output rate 0 kbits/sec, 0 Name iou-100_t100) 5 minute output rate 0 kbits/sec, 0 5 minute output rate 0 kbits/sec, 0 Name iou-100_t1) packets/sec Name iou-100_t2) packets/sec Tunnel100 (Destination 10.101.101.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Tunnel100 (Name p2mp-1_t100) Management statistics: Path: 0 no path, 0 path no longer valid, 0 missing ip exp path 97 path changes, 306 path lookups 0 protection pathoption_list errors 0 invalid inuse popt in pathoption list 0 loose path reoptimizations, triggered by PathErrors State: 1 transitions, 0 admin down, 0 oper down Signalling statistics: Opens: 1 succeeded, 0 timed out, 0 bad path spec 0 other aborts LSP Activations: 97 succeeded Last Failure: No path that satisfy tu
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Overflow Limit: 4 Overflow Threshold: 25% Overflow Threshold Crossed: 1 Sample Missed: 1 Samples Collected: 1 Active Path Option Parameters: State: dynamic path option 1 is active BandwidthOverride: disabled LockDown: disabled Verbatim: disabled InLabel : OutLabel : Serial3/0, 18 RSVP Signalling Info: Src 10.0.0.1, Dst 10.0.0.4, Tun_Id 2, Tun_Instance 2 RSVP Path Info: My Address: 10.105.0.1 Explicit Route: 10.105.0.2 104.105.0.1 10.0.0.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels RSVP Signalling Info: Src 100.100.100.100, Dst 10.10.0.2, Tun_Id 2, Tun_Instance 188 RSVP Path Info: My Address: 10.1.0.1 Explicit Route: 10.1.0.2 10.10.0.2 Record Route: NONE Tspec: ave rate=0 kbits, burst=1000 bytes, peak rate=0 kbits RSVP Resv Info: Record Route: NONE Fspec: ave rate=0 kbits, burst=1000 bytes, peak rate=0 kbits Shortest Unconstrained Path Info: Path Weight: 10 (TE) Explicit Route: 10.1.0.1 10.1.0.2 10.10.0.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Table 148 show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description STATE/PROT For tunnel heads, admin-down, up, or down. For nonheads, signaled. Adjustment threshold Configured threshold. This field is displayed only if a threshold is explicitly configured.
sshow mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics sshow mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics To display event counters for one or more Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnels, use the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics command in user EXEC and privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng tunnels [tunnel tunnel-name] statistics [summary] Syntax Description tunnel tunnel-name (Optional) Displays event counters accumulated for the specified tunnel.
sshow mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics Signalling statistics: Opens:2 succeeded, 0 timed out, 0 bad path spec 0 other aborts Errors:0 no b/w, 0 no route, 0 admin 0 bad exp route, 0 rec route loop, 0 other Router# show mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics Tunnel1001 (Destination 10.8.8.
sshow mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics Table 149 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng tunnels statistics Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Path Heading for counters for tunnel path events are as follows: • no path—Number of unsuccessful attempts to calculate a path for the tunnel. • path no longer valid—Number of times a previously valid path for the tunnel became invalid.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary To display summary information about tunnels, use the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Modes User EXEC Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.0(10)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary Table 150 Related Commands show mpls traffic-eng tunnels summary Field Descriptions Field Description LSP Tunnels Process Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering has or has not been enabled. Passive LSP Listener The device listens for LSPs and can terminate them, if desired. RSVP Process Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) has or has not been enabled. (This feature is enabled as a consequence of MPLS traffic engineering being enabled.
show mpls ttfib show mpls ttfib To display information about the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) TTFIB table, use the show mpls ttfib command in EXEC mode. show mpls ttfib [detail [hardware] | vrf instance [detail]] Syntax Description detail (Optional) Displays detailed information. hardware (Optional) Displays detailed hardware information. vrf instance (Optional) Displays entries for a specified Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding instance (VRF).
show running interface auto-template show running interface auto-template To display configuration information for a tunnel’s interface, use the show running interface auto-template command in privileged EXEC mode. show running interface auto-template num Syntax Description num Command Modes Privileged EXEC (#) Command History Release Modification 12.0(27)S This command was introduced. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.
show running interface auto-template Table 151 Related Commands show running interface auto-template Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description tunnel destination access-list 1 Indicates that access list 1 is the access list that the template interface will use for obtaining the autotunnel interface destination address. tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng Indicates that the mode of the autotunnel is set to Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) for traffic engineering.
show running-config vrf show running-config vrf To display the subset of the running configuration of a router that is linked to a specific Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance or to all VRFs configured on the router, use the show running-config vrf command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show running-config vrf route-target export 100:3 route-target import 100:3 ! ! interface Loopback1 ip vrf forwarding vpn3 ip address 10.43.43.43 255.255.255.255 ! interface Ethernet6/0 ip vrf forwarding vpn3 ip address 172.17.0.1 255.0.0.
show running-config vrf Table 152 show running-config vrf Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description router bgp 100 Sets up a BGP routing process for the router with autonomous system number 100. address-family ipv4 vrf vpn3 Sets up a routing session for VRF vpn3 using standard IP Version 4 address prefixes. redistribute connected Redistributes routes automatically established by IP on an interface into the BGP routing domain.
show tech-support mpls show tech-support mpls To generate a report of all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)-related information, use the show tech-support mpls command in privileged EXEC mode. show tech-support mpls [vrf vrf-name] Syntax Description vrf vrf-name Command Modes Privileged EXEC Command History Release Modification 12.2(25)S This command was introduced. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB and implemented on the Cisco 10000 series routers. 12.
show tech-support mpls show mpls interfaces all internal show mpls label range show mpls static binding MPLS Forwarding: Cell Mode (LC-ATM) Commands Note These commands are not supported on Cisco 10000 series routers.
show tech-support mpls show ip rsvp neighbor show ip rsvp reservation show ip rsvp sender show isis mpls traffic-eng adjacency-log show isis mpls traffic-eng advertisements show isis mpls traffic-eng tunnel show mpls traffic-end link-management interfaces show mpls traffic-eng autoroute show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute database detail show mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute log reroutes show mpls traffic-eng forwarding adjacency show mpls traffic-eng link-management admission-control show mpls traffic-eng lin
show tech-support mpls show ip cef vrf vpn-name inconsistency show ip cef vrf vpn-name internal show ip cef vrf vpn-name summary show ip route vrf vpn-name show ip vrf interfaces vpn-name show mpls forwarding-table vrf vpn-name show mpls interface vrfvpn-name detail MPLS LDP VRF-Specific Commands show show show show show show mpls ip binding vrf vpn-name atm detail mpls ip binding vrf vpn-name detail mpls ip binding vrf vpn-name local mpls ip binding vrf vpn-name summary mpls ldp discovery vrf vpn-name d
show tech-support mpls Current configuration : 1827 bytes . . . ------------------ show mpls ldp graceful-restart -----------------LDP Graceful Restart is disabled Neighbor Liveness Timer: 120 seconds Max Recovery Time: 120 seconds Forwarding State Holding Time: 600 seconds Related Commands Command Description show tech-support Displays the equivalent of the show buffers, show controllers, show interfaces, show process, show process memory, show running-config, show stacks, and show version commands.
show vrf show vrf To display the defined Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instances, use the show vrf command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show vrf [ipv4 | ipv6] [interface | brief | detail | id | select | lock] [vrf-name] Syntax Description ipv4 (Optional) Displays IPv4 address-family type VRF instances. ipv6 (Optional) Displays IPv6 address-family type VRF instances. interface (Optional) Displays the interface associated with the specified VRF instances.
show vrf Examples The following is the sample output from the show vrf command that displays brief information about all configured VRF instances: Router# show vrf Name N1 V1 V2 Default RD 100:0 1:1 2:2 Protocols ipv4,ipv6 ipv4 ipv4,ipv6 V3 3:3 ipv4 Interfaces Lo1 Et0/1.1 Et0/1.2 Et0/1.3 Lo3 Et0/1.4 Table 153 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 153 show vrf Field Descriptions Field Description Name Name of the VRF instance.
show vrf Table 154 show vrf detail Field Descriptions Field Description default RD 100:1 The RD given to this VRF. Interfaces: Interfaces to which the VRF is attached. Export VPN route-target communities Route-target VPN extended communities to be exported. RT:100:1 Import VPN route-target communities RT:100:1 Route-target VPN extended communities to be imported.
show vrf Lock user: VRFMGR, lock user ID: 1, lock count per user: 1 Caller PC tracebacks: Trace backs: :10000000+44DAEB4 :10000000+21E83AC :10000000+21EAD18 :10C Related Commands Command Description vrf definition Configures a VRF routing table instance and enters VRF configuration mode. vrf forwarding Associates a VRF instance with an interface or subinterface.
show xconnect show xconnect To display information about xconnect attachment circuits and pseudowires, use the show xconnect command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show xconnect all Displays all xconnect information associated with the specified peer IP address. vcid Displays xconnect information associated with the specified peer IP address and the specified VC ID. vcid-value Specifies the VC ID value. pwmib Displays information about pseudowires Management Information Base (MIB). memory Displays information about the xconnect memory usage. rib Displays information about the pseudowire Routing Information Base (RIB).
show xconnect Examples The following example shows show xconnect all command output in the brief (default) display format: Router# show xconnect all Legend: XC ST=Xconnect State, S1=Segment1 State, S2=Segment2 State UP=Up, DN=Down, AD=Admin Down, IA=Inactive, SB=Standby, RV=Recovering, NH=No Hardware XC ST Segment 1 S1 Segment 2 S2 ------+---------------------------------+--+---------------------------------+-UP ac Et0/0(Ethernet) UP mpls 10.55.55.2:1000 UP UP ac Se7/0(PPP) UP mpls 10.55.55.
show xconnect IA sec ac Se6/0:225(FR DLCI) Interworking: none IA pri ac Et1/0.2:100(Eth VLAN) Interworking: none Et1/0.2:100(Eth VLAN) Interworking: none UP sec ac UP ac UP mpls 10.55.55.3:5226 Local VC label unassigned Remote VC label 22 pw-class: mpls UP ac Et2/0.2:100(Eth VLAN) Interworking: none UP mpls 10.55.55.
show xconnect Table 155 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 155 show xconnect all Field Descriptions Field Description XC ST State of the xconnect attachment circuit or pseudowire. Valid states are: Segment1 or Segment2 S1 • DN—The xconnect attachment circuit or pseudowire is down. Either segment 1, segment 2, or both segments are down. • IA—The xconnect attachment circuit or pseudowire is inactive. This state is valid only when pseudowire redundancy is configured.
show xconnect For VPLS Autodiscovery, issuing the show xconnect command with the rib keyword provides RIB detail, as shown in the following: Router# show xconnect rib Local Router ID: 10.9.9.9 Legend: O=Origin, P=Provisioned, TID=Target ID, B=BGP, Y=Yes, N=No O P VPLS/VPWS-ID TID Next-Hop Route-Target -+-+---------------------+------------+---------------+--------------------B Y 10:123 10.7.7.7 10.7.7.7 10:123 B N 10:123 10.7.7.8 10.7.7.8 10:123 B Y 10.100.100.100:1234 10.0.0.2 10.2.2.2 10.111.111.
show xconnect Route-Target: 10:123 Incoming RD: 10:11 Forwarder: vfi VPLS1 Origin: BGP Provisioned: No VPLS-ID 10.100.100.100:1234, TID 0.0.0.2 Next-Hop: 10.2.2.2, 10.3.3.3, 10.4.4.4 Hello-Source: 10.9.9.9 Route-Target: 10.111.111.111:12345, 10.8.8.8:345 Incoming RD: 10:12 Forwarder: vfi VPLS2 Origin: BGP Provisioned: Yes VPLS-ID 10.100.100.100:1234, TID 10.13.1.1 Next-Hop: 10.1.1.1 Hello-Source: 10.9.9.9 Route-Target: 10.111.111.
show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display information about quality of service (QoS) bandwidth allocation on extended Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM (XTagATM) interfaces, use the show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation Table 158 show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation Field Descriptions Field Description CoS Class of service for transmitted packets. Bandwidth Allocation Percentage bandwidth allocated to each QoS traffic category.
show xtagatm cross-connect show xtagatm cross-connect Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show xtagatm cross-connect command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display information about the Label Switch Controller (LSC) view of the cross-connect table on the remotely controlled ATM switch, use the show xtagatm cross-connect command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.
show xtagatm cross-connect 10.3.0 10.3.0 10.3.0 10.3.0 10.3.0 10.3.0 1/49 1/47 1/37 1/35 1/33 0/32 <<<<<<-> 10.2.0 10.2.0 10.1.0 10.1.0 10.1.0 10.1.0 1/57 1/53 1/38 1/37 1/34 1/32 UP UP UP UP UP UP Table 159 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 159 show xtagatm cross-connect Field Descriptions Field Description Phys desc Physical descriptor. A switch-supplied string identifying the interface on which the endpoint exists.
show xtagatm cross-connect Phys desc: 10.1.0 Interface: n/a Intf type: switch control port VPI/VCI: 1/42 X-Phys desc: 10.2.0 X-Interface: XTagATM0 X-Intf type: extended tag ATM X-VPI/VCI: 2/38 Conn-state: UP Conn-type: input/output Cast-type: point-to-point Rx service type: Tag COS 0 Rx cell rate: n/a Rx peak cell rate: 10000 Tx service type: Tag COS 0 Tx cell rate: n/a Tx peak cell rate: 10000 Table 160 describes the significant fields shown in the display.
show xtagatm cross-connect Table 160 show xtagatm cross-connect descriptor Field Descriptions (continued) Field Description Conn-state Indicates the status of the cross-connect to which this endpoint belongs.
show xtagatm vc show xtagatm vc Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the show xtagatm vc command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To display information about terminating virtual circuits (VCs) on extended Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM (XTagATM) interfaces, use the show xtagatm vc command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show xtagatm vc [vcd [interface]] Syntax Description vcd (Optional) Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number).
show xtagatm vc Table 161 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 161 Related Commands show xtagatm vc Field Descriptions Field Description VCD Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number). VPI Virtual path identifier. VCI Virtual circuit identifier. Control Interf. VCD VCD for the corresponding private VC on the control interface. Control Interf. VPI VPI for the corresponding private VC on the control interface. Control Interf.
snmp mib mpls vpn snmp mib mpls vpn To configure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) controls for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) notification thresholds, use the snmp mib mpls vpn command in global configuration mode. To disable SNMP controls for MPLS VPN thresholds, use the no form of this command.
snmp mib mpls vpn Examples The following example shows how to configure an illegal label threshold of 50 labels: configure terminal ! smnp mib mpls vpn illegal-label 50 The following example shows how to configure the time interval of 600 seconds for resending maximum threshold notifications: configure terminal ! smnp mib mpls vpn max-threshold 600 Related Commands Command Description ip vrf Specifies a name for a VRF routing table and enters VRF configuration mode (for IPv4 VRF only).
snmp-server community snmp-server community To set up the community access string to permit access to the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), use the snmp-server community command in global configuration mode. To remove the specified community string, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server community Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 10.0 This command was introduced. 12.0(14)ST This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(14)ST. 12.0(17)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(17)S. 12.2(14)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(14)S. 12.3(2)T The access list values were enhanced to support the expanded range of standard access list values and to support named standard access lists. 12.
snmp-server community The following example shows how to assign the string manager to SNMP and allow read-write access to the objects in the restricted view: Router(config)# snmp-server community manager view restricted rw The following example shows how to remove the community comaccess: Router(config)# no snmp-server community comaccess The following example shows how to disable all versions of SNMP: Router(config)# no snmp-server The following example shows how to configure an IPv6 access list named
snmp-server enable traps (MPLS) snmp-server enable traps (MPLS) To enable a label switch router (LSR) to send Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications or informs to an SNMP host, use the snmp-server enable traps command in global configuration mode. To disable notifications or informs, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server enable traps (MPLS) notification-type (continued) notification-option • mpls ldp—Sends notifications about status changes in LDP sessions. Note that this keyword is specified as mpls ldp. This syntax, which the CLI interprets as a two-word construct, has been implemented in this manner to maintain consistency with other MPLS commands. Notification-option arguments (below) can be specified in combination with this keyword.
snmp-server enable traps (MPLS) Defaults If you issue this command on an LSR without specifying any notification-type keywords, the default behavior of the LSR is to enable all notification types controlled by the command (some notification types cannot be controlled by means of this command). Command Modes Global configuration Command History Release Modification 11.1 This command was introduced. 11.
snmp-server enable traps (MPLS) In the following example, the router is enabled to send Frame Relay and environmental monitor notifications to the host specified as myhost.cisco.com. The community string is defined as public: Router(config)# snmp-server enable traps frame-relay Router(config)# snmp-server enable traps envmon temperature Router(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com public In the following example, notifications are not sent to any host.
snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp To enable the sending of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications, use the snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp command in global configuration mode. To disable the sending of MPLS LDP notifications, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp The MPLS LDP threshold (mplsLdpFailedInitSessionThresholdExceeded) notification object provides a warning message that can be sent to an NMS when a local LSR and an adjacent LDP peer attempt to set up an LDP session between them, but fail to do so after a specified number of attempts. The default number of attempts is 8. This default value is implemented in Cisco IOS software and cannot be changed using either the command line interface (CLI) or an SNMP agent.
snmp-server enable traps mpls ldp Related Commands Command Description snmp-server host Specifies whether you want the SNMP notifications sent as traps or informs, the version of SNMP to use, the security level of the notifications (for SNMPv3), and the recipient (host) of the notifications.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp To enable the sending of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications defined in RFC 3815, use the snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp command in global configuration mode. To disable the sending of MPLS LDP notifications, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp The MPLS LDP threshold (mplsLdpFailedInitSessionThresholdExceeded) notification object provides a warning message that can be sent to an NMS when a local LSR and an adjacent LDP peer attempt to set up an LDP session between them, but fail to do so after a specified number of attempts. The default number of attempts is eight. This default value is implemented in Cisco IOS software and cannot be changed using either the command-line interface (CLI) or an SNMP agent.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc ldp Related Commands Command Description snmp-server host Specifies whether you want the SNMP notifications sent as traps or informs, the version of SNMP to use, the security level of the notifications (for SNMPv3), and the recipient (host) of the notifications.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn To enable the sending of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications defined in RFC 4382, use the snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn command in global configuration mode.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn The illegal-label keyword enables a notification for illegal labels received on a VRF interface. Labels are illegal if they are outside the legal range, do not have a Label Forwarding Information Base (LFIB) entry, or do not match table IDs for the label.
snmp-server enable traps mpls rfc vpn Examples • mplsL3VpnVrfUp • mplsL3VpnVrfDown • mplsL3VpnVrfRouteMidThreshExceeded • mplsL3VpnVrfNumVrfRouteMaxThreshExceeded • mplsL3VpnNumVrfSecIllglLblThrshExcd • mplsL3VpnNumVrfRouteMaxThreshCleared In the following example, MPLS RFC VPN trap notifications are sent to the host specified as 172.31.156.34 using the community string named public if a VRF transitions from an up or down state: Router(config)# snmp-server host 172.31.156.
snmp-server enable traps mpls traffic-eng snmp-server enable traps mpls traffic-eng To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel state-change Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications, use the snmp-server enable traps mpls traffic-eng command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS traffic engineering tunnel state-change SNMP notifications, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server enable traps mpls traffic-eng When the reroute keyword is used, mplsTunnelRerouted notifications are sent to the NMS under the following conditions: • The signaling path of an existing MPLS traffic engineering tunnel fails and a new path option is signaled and placed into effect (that is, the tunnel is rerouted).
snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn To enable the router to send Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN)-specific Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications (traps and informs), use the snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn command in global configuration mode. To disable MPLS VPN specific SNMP notifications, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.2(33)SXH This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXH. 12.2SX This command is supported in the Cisco IOS Release 12.2SX train. Support in a specific 12.2SX release of this train depends on your feature set, platform, and platform hardware. If this command is used without any of the optional keywords, all MPLS VPN notification types are enabled.
snmp-server enable traps mpls vpn • mplsNumVrfSecIllegalLabelThreshExceeded The cMplsNumVrfRouteMaxThreshCleared notification type is defined in the CISCO-IETF-PPVPN-MPLS-VPN-MIB. Examples In the following example, MPLS VPN trap notifications are sent to the host specified as 172.31.156.34 using the community string named public if a VRF transitions from an up or down state: Router(config)# snmp-server host 172.31.156.
snmp-server group snmp-server group To configure a new Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) group, use the snmp-server group command in global configuration mode. To remove a specified SNMP group, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server group notify-view (Optional) String of a maximum of 64 characters that is the name of the view. By default, nothing is defined for the notify view (that is, the null OID) until the snmp-server host command is configured. If a view is specified in the snmp-server group command, any notifications in that view that are generated will be sent to all users associated with the group (provided a SNMP server host configuration exists for the user).
snmp-server group No default values exist for authentication or privacy algorithms when you configure the snmp-server group command. Also, no default passwords exist. For information about specifying a Message Digest 5 (MD5) password, see the documentation of the snmp-server user command. Configuring Notify Views The notify-view option is available for two reasons: • If a group has a notify view that is set using SNMP, you may need to change the notify view.
snmp-server group Related Commands Command Description show snmp group Displays the names of groups on the router and the security model, the status of the different views, and the storage type of each group. snmp mib community-map Associates a SNMP community with an SNMP context, engine ID, security name, or VPN target list. snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of a SNMP notification operation. snmp-server user Configures a new user to a SNMP group.
snmp-server host snmp-server host To specify the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notification operation, use the snmp-server host command in global configuration mode. To remove the specified host from the configuration, use the no form of this command.
snmp-server host udp-port (Optional) Specifies that SNMP traps or informs are to be sent to an NMS host. port (Optional) UDP port number of the NMS host. The default is 162. notification-type (Optional) Type of notification to be sent to the host. If no type is specified, all available notifications are sent. The notification type can be one or more of the following keywords: • bgp—Sends Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) state change notifications.
snmp-server host • mpls-traffic-eng—Sends MPLS traffic engineering notifications indicating changes in the status of MPLS traffic engineering tunnels. • mpls-vpn—Sends MPLS VPN notifications. • nhrp—Sends Next Hop Resolution Protocol (NHRP) notifications. • ospf—Sends Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) sham-link notifications. • pim—Sends Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) notifications. • repeater—Sends standard repeater (hub) notifications.
snmp-server host Command History Release Modification 10.0 This command was introduced. Cisco IOS Release 12 Mainline/T Train 12.0(3)T 12.1(3)T 12.2(2)T 12.2(4)T 12.2(8)T 12.2(13)T 12.3(2)T 12.3(4)T • The version 3 [auth | noauth | priv] syntax was added as part of the SNMPv3 Support feature. • The hsrp notification-type keyword was added. • The voice notification-type keyword was added. The calltracker notification-type keyword was added for the Cisco AS5300 and AS5800 platforms.
snmp-server host Release Modification 12.0(23)S The l2tun-session notification-type keyword was added. 12.0(26)S The memory notification-type keyword was added. 12.0(27)S 12.0(31)S • Support for SNMP over IPv6 transport was added. Either an IP or IPv6 Internet address can be specified as the hostname argument. • The vrf vrf-name keyword argument pair was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(27)S to support multiple Lightweight Directory Protocol (LDP) contexts for VPNs.
snmp-server host To enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host. When multiple snmp-server host commands are given for the same host and kind of notification (trap or inform), each succeeding command overwrites the previous command. Only the last snmp-server host command will be in effect.
snmp-server host Examples If you want to configure a unique SNMP community string for traps but prevent SNMP polling access with this string, the configuration should include an access list. The following example shows how to name a community string comaccess and number an access list 10: Router(config)# snmp-server community comaccess ro 10 Router(config)# snmp-server host 192.20.2.
snmp-server host The following example shows how to specify VRRP as the protocol using the community string public: Router(config)# snmp-server enable traps vrrp Router(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com traps version 2c public vrrp The following example shows how to send all Cisco Express Forwarding informs to the notification receiver with the IP address 192.40.3.130 using the community string public: Router(config)# snmp-server enable traps cef Router(config)# snmp-server host 192.40.3.
status (pseudowire class) status (pseudowire class) To enable the router to send pseudowire status messages to a peer router, even when the attachment circuit is down, use the status command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To disable the pseudowire status messages, use the no form of this command. status no status Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Pseudowire status messages are sent and received if both routers support the messages.
status redundancy status redundancy To designate one pseudowire as the master or slave to display status information for both active and backup pseudowires, use the status redundancy command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To disable the pseudowire as the master or slave, use the no form of this command. status redundancy {master | slave} no status redundancy {master | slave} Syntax Description master Designates one pseudowire to work as the master.
switching tlv switching tlv To advertise the switching point type-length variable (TLV) in the label binding, use the switching tlv command in pseudowire class configuration mode. To disable the display of the TLV, use the no form of this command. switching tlv no switching tlv Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default Switching point TLV data is advertised to peers.
switching tlv Cisco IOS Multiprotocol Label Switching Command Reference MP-824 January 2010
ttag-control-protocol vsi ttag-control-protocol vsi Note Effective with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T, the tag-control-protocol vsi command is not available in Cisco IOS software. To configure the use of Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) on a particular master control port, use the tag-control-protocol vsi command in interface configuration mode. To disable VSI, use the no form of this command.
ttag-control-protocol vsi nak [basic | extended] (Optional) Allows the label switch controller (LSC) to request extended negative acknowledgment (NAK) responses from the VSI slave. The extended NAK response indicates a dangling connection on the VSI slave. If the slave sends an extended NAK response code, the LSC sends a delete connection command that enables the VSI slave to delete the dangling connection. Use the basic keyword to specify the NAK 11 and NAK 12 response codes from the VSI.
ttag-control-protocol vsi – slaves The VSI remains continuously active (that is, the VSI does not shut down and then reactivate) if you reenter the tag-control-protocol vsi command with only one or both of the following options: – keepalive – retry – delay In either case, if you reenter the tag-control-protocol vsi command, this causes the specified options to take on the newly specified values; the other options retain their previous values.
ttag-control-protocol vsi Table 163 describes the significant fields shown in the display. Table 163 show controllers vsi session Field Descriptions Field Description Interface Control interface name. Session Session number (from 0 to ), where n is the number of sessions on the control interface. VCD Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number). Identifies the VC carrying the VSI protocol between the master and the slave for this session.
trace mpls trace mpls To discover Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) label switched path (LSP) routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destinations, use the trace mpls command in privileged EXEC mode.
trace mpls revision {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} (Optional) Selects the type, length, values (TLVs) version of the implementation. Use the revision 4 default unless attempting to interoperate with devices running Cisco IOS Release 12.0(27)S1 or 12.0(27)S2. If you do not select a revision keyword, the software uses the latest version. See Table 164 in the“Revision Keyword Usage” section of the “Usage Guidelines” section for information on when to select the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keywords.
trace mpls Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(27)S This command was introduced. 12.2(18)SXE The reply dscp and reply pad-tlv keywords were added. 12.4(6)T The following keywords were added: force-explicit-null, output interface, flags fec, and revision. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB and implemented on the Cisco 10000 series routers. 12.0(32)SY This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(32)SY. 12.
trace mpls Pseudowire Usage The following keywords are not available with the trace mpls pseudowire command: • flags • force-explicit-null • output • revision • ttl Revision Keyword Usage The revision keyword allows you to issue a trace mpls ipv4 or trace mpls traffic-eng command based on the format of the TLV. Table 164 lists the revision option and usage guidelines for each option.
trace mpls Repeat [1]: Packet size [100]: Timeout in seconds [2]: Extended commands? [no]: yes Destination start address: Destination end address: Source address: EXP bits in mpls header [0]: TimeToLive [255]: Reply mode (2-ipv4 via udp, 3-ipv4 via udp with router alert) [2]: Reply ip header DSCP bits [0]: Tracing MPLS Label Switched Path to 10.131.191.252/32, timeout is 2 seconds Codes: '!' 'L' 'D' 'M' 'P' 'R' - success, 'Q' - request not sent, '.
trace mpls 'M' - malformed request, 'm' - unsupported tlvs, 'N' - no rx label, 'P' - no rx intf label prot, 'p' - premature termination of LSP, 'R' - transit router, 'X' - unknown return code, 'x' - return code 0 Type escape sequence to abort. 0 10.131.159.230 mtu 1500 [Labels: 22 Exp: 0] R 1 10.131.159.225 mtu 1500 [Labels: 22 Exp: 6] 72 ms R 2 10.131.191.229 mtu 1504 [implicit-null] 72 ms ! 3 10.131.191.
trace mpls 'L' 'D' 'M' 'P' 'R' 'X' - labeled output interface, 'B' - unlabeled output interface, DS Map mismatch, 'F' - no FEC mapping, 'f' - FEC mismatch, malformed request, 'm' - unsupported tlvs, 'N' - no label entry, no rx intf label prot, 'p' - premature termination of LSP, transit router, 'I' - unknown upstream index, unknown return code, 'x' - return code 0 Type escape sequence to abort. L 1 10.10.9.9 4 ms [Labels: 18 Exp: 0] local 10.10.10.22 remote 10.10.10.9 vc id 220 ! 2 10.10.3.
trace mpls multipath trace mpls multipath To discover all Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) label switched paths (LSPs) from an egress router to an ingress router, use the trace mpls multipath command in privileged EXEC mode.
trace mpls multipath reply dscp dscp-value (Optional) Controls the differentiated services codepoint (DSCP) value of an echo reply. Allows the support of a class of service (CoS) in an echo reply. retry-count retry-count-value (Optional) Sets the number of timeout retry attempts during a multipath LSP trace. A retry is attempted if an outstanding echo request times out waiting for the corresponding echo reply. A retry-count-value of 0 means infinite retries. Valid values are from 0 to 10.
trace mpls multipath request destination address in the UDP packet is not used to forward the MPLS packet to the destination router. The label stack that is used to forward the echo request routes the MPLS packet to the destination router. The 127/8 address guarantees that the packets are routed to the localhost (the default loopback address of the router processing the address) if the UDP packet destination address is used for forwarding.
trace mpls multipath Paths (found/broken/unexplored) (4/0/0) Echo Request (sent/fail) (14/0) Echo Reply (received/timeout) (14/0) Total Time Elapsed 460 ms The following example shows that outgoing MPLS Operation, Administration, and Management (OAM) echo request packets will go through the interface e0/0 and will be restricted to the path with the next hop address of 10.0.0.3: Router# trace multipath ipv4 10.4.4.4/32 output interface e0/0 nexthop 10.0.0.3 Starting LSP Multipath Traceroute for 10.4.4.
traffic-engineering filter traffic-engineering filter To specify a filter with the given number and properties, use the traffic-engineering filter command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. traffic-engineering filter filter-number egress ip-address mask no traffic-engineering filter Syntax Description filter-number A decimal value representing the number of the filter. egress ip-address mask IP address and mask for the egress port.
traffic-engineering route traffic-engineering route To configure a route for a specified filter through a specified tunnel, use the traffic-engineering route command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
traffic-engineering route Examples The following example shows how to configure a traffic engineering filter and a traffic engineering route for that filter through an LSP-encapsulated tunnel for the traffic engineering routing process: Router(config)# router traffic-engineering Router(config-router)# traffic-engineering filter 5 egress 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.
tunnel destination access-list tunnel destination access-list To specify the access list that the template interface uses for obtaining the mesh tunnel interface destination address, use the tunnel destination access-list command in interface configuration mode. To remove the access list from this template interface, use the no form of this command.
tunnel destination access-list Related Commands Command Description interface auto-template Creates the template interface. mpls traffic-eng auto-tunnel mesh tunnel-num Configures a range of mesh tunnel interface numbers.
tunnel destination list mpls traffic-eng tunnel destination list mpls traffic-eng To specify a list of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-multipoint (P2MP) destinations, use the tunnel destination list mpls traffic-eng command in interface configuration mode. To remove the destination list, use the no form of this command.
tunnel destination mesh-group tunnel destination mesh-group To specify a mesh group that an autotemplate interface uses to signal tunnels for all mesh group members, use the tunnel destination mesh group command in interface configuration mode. To remove a mesh group from the template, use the no form of this command. tunnel destination mesh-group mesh-group-id no tunnel destination mesh-group mesh-group-id Syntax Description mesh-group-id Command Default Mesh-groups are not advertised.
tunnel flow egress-records tunnel flow egress-records To create a NetFlow record for packets that are encapsulated by a generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnel when both NetFlow and Cisco Express Forwarding are enabled, use the tunnel flow egress-records command in interface configuration mode. To disable NetFlow record creation, use the no form of this command. tunnel flow egress-records no tunnel flow egress-records Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng To set the mode of a tunnel to Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) for traffic engineering, use the tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng no tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Defaults Disabled.
tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option Configures a path option. tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority Configures setup and reservation priority for an MPLS traffic engineering tunnel.
tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng point-to-multipoint tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng point-to-multipoint To enable the configuration of a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) point-to-multipoint (P2MP) tunnel, use the tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng point-to-multipoint command in interface configuration mode. To remove the tunnel, use the no form of this command. tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng point-to-multipoint no tunnel mode Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity To configure an affinity (the properties the tunnel requires in its links) for a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity command in interface configuration mode. To disable the MPLS traffic engineering tunnel affinity, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity Examples The following example shows how to set the affinity of the tunnel to 0x0101 mask 0x303: Router(config-if)# tunnel mpls traffic-eng affinity 0x0101 mask 0x303 Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng attribute-flags Sets the attributes for the interface. tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng Sets the mode of a tunnel to MPLS for traffic engineering.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute destination tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute destination To automatically route traffic through a traffic engineering (TE) tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute destination command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command. tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute destination no tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute destination Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw To configure a tunnel for automatic bandwidth adjustment and to control the manner in which the bandwidth for a tunnel is adjusted, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw command in interface configuration mode. To disable automatic bandwidth adjustment for a tunnel, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw Usage Guidelines If you enter the command with no optional keywords or arguments, automatic bandwidth adjustment for the tunnel is enabled, with adjustments made every 24 hours and with no constraints on the bandwidth adjustment made. To sample the bandwidth used by a tunnel without automatically adjusting it, specify the collect-bw keyword in the tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw Examples The following example shows how to enable automatic bandwidth adjustment for tunnel102 and specify that the adjustments are to occur every hour: Router(config)# interface tunnel102 Router(config-if)# tunnel mpls traffic-eng auto-bw frequency 3600 Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng auto-bw timers Enables automatic bandwidth adjustment on a platform for tunnels configured for bandwidth adjustment.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce To specify that the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) should use the tunnel (if the tunnel is up) in its enhanced shortest path first (SPF) calculation, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute metric tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute metric To specify the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel metric that the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) enhanced shortest path first (SPF) calculation uses, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute metric command in interface configuration mode. To disable the specified MPLS traffic engineering tunnel metric, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute metric Related Commands Command Description show mpls traffic-eng autoroute Displays the tunnels announced to IGP, including interface, destination, and bandwidth. tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce Instructs the IGP to use the tunnel (if it is up) in its enhanced SPF calculation.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-bw tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-bw To specify what types of label-switched paths (LSPs) can use a backup tunnel or whether the backup tunnel should provide bandwidth protection, and if so, how much, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-bw command in interface configuration mode.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng backup-bw Examples In the following example, backup tunnel 1 is to be used only by LSPs that take their bandwidth from the global pool. The backup tunnel does not provide bandwidth protection. Backup tunnel 2 is to be used only by LSPs that take their bandwidth from the subpool. Backup tunnel 2 provides bandwidth protection for up to 1000 units.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth To configure bandwidth required for a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth command in interface configuration mode. To disable this bandwidth configuration, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth Examples The following example shows how to configure 100 kbps of bandwidth for the MPLS traffic engineering tunnel: Router(config-if)# tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth 100 Related Commands Command Description ip rsvp bandwidth Enables RSVP for IP on an interface. show mpls traffic-eng tunnel Displays information about tunnels.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp To specify the experimental (EXP) bits that will be forwarded over a member tunnel that is part of the Class-Based Tunnel Selection (CBTS) bundle, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp command in interface configuration mode. To disable forwarding of the EXP bits, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp This command allows configurations where: • Not all EXP values are explicitly allocated to tunnels. • Multiple tunnels have the default property. • Some tunnels have EXP values configured and others do not have any configured. • A given EXP value is configured on multiple tunnels. The configuration of each tunnel is independent of the configuration of any other tunnel.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle master tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle master To configure a master tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp bundle master command in interface configuration mode. To unconfigure a master tunnel, use the no form of this command. tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle master no tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle master Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Command Default There is no master tunnel for the bundle.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle master Related Commands Command Description tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle member Identifies which tunnel is a member (bundled tunnel) of a master tunnel.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle member tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle member To identify which tunnel is a member (bundled tunnel) of a master tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng exp-bundle member command in interface configuration mode. To remove the specified tunnel from being a member of the master tunnel, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute To enable a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) tunnel to use an established backup tunnel in the event of a link or node failure, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute command in interface configuration mode. To disable this capability, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute Examples In the following example, backup bandwidth protection is enabled: Router(config-if)# tunnel mpls traffic-eng fast-reroute bw-protect Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng backup-path tunnel Configures the interface to use a backup tunnel in the event of a detected failure on the interface.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency tunnel mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency To advertise a traffic engineering (TE) tunnel as a link in an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) network, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency command in interface configuration mode. To disable the functionality, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Related Commands Command Description debug mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Displays debug messages for traffic engineering, forwarding adjacency events. isis metric Configures the cost metric for an interface. show mpls traffic-eng forwarding-adjacency Displays TE tunnels being advertised as links in an IGP network.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng interface down delay tunnel mpls traffic-eng interface down delay To force a tunnel to go down as soon as the headend router detects that the label-switched path (LSP) is down, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng interface down delay command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng load-share tunnel mpls traffic-eng load-share To determine load-sharing among two or more Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) tunnels that begin at the same router and go to an identical destination, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng load-share command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng load-share Examples In the following example, three tunnels are configured, with the first tunnel receiving half of the traffic and the other two tunnels receiving one-quarter: interface Tunnel1 ip unnumbered Loopback0 no ip directed-broadcast tunnel destination 41.41.41.41 tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option 10 dynamic tunnel mpls traffic-eng load-share 2 interface Tunnel2 ip unnumbered Loopback0 no ip directed-broadcast tunnel destination 41.41.41.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option To configure a path option for a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option command in interface configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option Related Commands Command Description ip explicit-path Enters the command mode for IP explicit paths and creates or modifies the specified path. mpls traffic-eng lsp attributes Creates or modifies an LSP attribute list. show ip explicit-paths Displays the configured IP explicit paths. tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect Configures a secondary path option for an MPLS TE tunnel.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect To configure a secondary path option for a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect command in interface configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option protect Command History Usage Guidelines Release Modification 12.0(5)S This command was introduced. 12.0(26)S LSP-related keywords and arguments for path options were added. 12.0(30)S The protect keyword was added. 12.2(33)SRA This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SRA. 12.2(28)SB This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(28)SB. 12.2(33)SXH This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(33)SXH. 12.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric To specify the metric type to use for path calculation for a tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric command in interface configuration mode. To remove the specified metric type, use the no form of this command. tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric {igp | te} no tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric Syntax Description igp Use the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) metric.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric Related Commands Command Description mpls traffic-eng path-selection metric Specifies the metric type to use for path calculation for TE tunnels for which no metric has been explicitly configured.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority To configure the setup and reservation priority for an Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE) tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority command in interface configuration mode. To remove the specified setup and reservation priority, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority Examples The following example shows how to configure a tunnel with a setup and hold priority of 1: Router(config-if)# tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority 1 Related Commands Command Description tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng Sets the mode of a tunnel to MPLS for traffic engineering.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng record-route tunnel mpls traffic-eng record-route To include the interface address for the label switched path (LSP) in the Record Route Object (RRO) for an RESV message, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng record-route command in interface configuration mode. To remove the interface address for the LSP in the RRO for the RESV message, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng record-route Related Commands, Command Description show ip rsvp reservation Displays current RSVP related receiver information in the database. show mpls traffic-eng tunnels Displays information on the source, destination, path and interface of MPLS TE tunnels. tunnel mpls traffic-eng Enables an MPLS TE tunnel to use an established backup tunnel in the event of a link or node failure.
tunnel tsp-hop tunnel tsp-hop To define hops in the path for the label switching tunnel, use the tunnel tsp-hop command in interface configuration mode. To remove these hops, use the no form of this command. tunnel tsp-hop hop-number ip-address [lasthop] no tunnel tsp-hop hop-number ip-address [lasthop] Syntax Description hop-number The sequence number of the hop being defined in the path. The first number is 1, which identifies the hop just after the head hop.
vpn id vpn id To set or update a Virtual Private Network (VPN) ID on a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, use the vpn id command in VRF configuration mode. vpn id oui:vpn-index Syntax Description oui: Organizationally unique identifier (OUI). The IEEE organization assigns this identifier to companies. The OUI is restricted to three octets and followed by a colon. vpn-index Identifies the VPN within the company. This VPN index is restricted to four octets. Defaults The VPN ID is not set.
vpn id Related Commands Command Description show ip vrf detail Displays all the VRFs on a router. show ip vrf id Displays all the VPN IDs that are configured in the router and their associated VRF names and VRF RDs.
vrf definition vrf definition To configure a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) routing table instance and enter VRF configuration mode, use the vrf definition command in global configuration mode. To remove a VRF routing table, use the no form of this command. vrf definition vrf-name no vrf definition vrf-name Syntax Description vrf-name Command Default No VRFs are defined. No import or export lists are associated with a VRF. No route maps are associated with a VRF.
vrf definition Examples The following example assigns the name vrf1 to a VRF, enters VRF configuration mode, and configures a route distinguisher, 100:20: Router(config)# vrf definition vrf1 Router(config-vrf)# rd 100:20 Related Commands Command Description address-family Enters address family configuration mode for configuring routing protocols such as BGP, RIP, and static routing. context Associates an SNMP context with a particular VRF. rd Specifies a route distinguisher.
vrf forwarding vrf forwarding To associate a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance with an interface or subinterface, use the vrf forwarding command in interface configuration mode. To disassociate a VRF from an interface, use the no form of this command. vrf forwarding vrf-name no vrf forwarding vrf-name Syntax Description vrf-name Command Default The default for an interface is the global routing table.
vrf selection source vrf selection source To populate a single source IP address, or range of source IP addresses, to a VRF Selection table, use the vrf selection source command in global configuration mode. To remove a single source IP address or range of source IP addresses from a VRF Selection table, use the no form of this command.
vrf selection source Examples The following example shows how to populate the VRF Selection table vpn1 with a source IP network address 10.0.0.0 and the IP mask 255.0.0.0, which would forward any packets with the source IP address 10.0.0.0 into the VRF instance vpn1: Router(config)# vrf selection source 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 vrf vpn1 The following example shows the message you receive after you have removed the source IP network address 107.1.1.1 and the IP mask 255.255.255.
vrf upgrade-cli vrf upgrade-cli To upgrade a Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) instance or all VRFs on the router to support multiple address families (multi-AFs) for the same VRF, use the vrf upgrade-cli command in global configuration mode. vrf upgrade-cli multi-af-mode {common-policies | non-common-policies} [vrf vrf-name] Syntax Description multi-af-mode Specifies an upgrade of a single-protocol VRF or all VRFs to a multiprotocol VRF that supports multi-AFs configuration.
vrf upgrade-cli After the upgrade to a multiprotocol VRF is complete, you can edit the VRF only with multiprotocol VRF configuration commands. Examples The following example shows how to upgrade a single-protocol VRF configuration named vrf1 to a multi-AF VRF configuration and apply the common policies of vrf1 to all address families defined for the VRF: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
xconnect xconnect To bind an attachment circuit to a pseudowire, and to configure an Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) static pseudowire, use the xconnect command in one of the supported configuration modes. To restore the default values, use the no form of this command.
xconnect Command Modes Connect configuration Interface configuration (config-if) l2transport configuration (for ATM) Command History Release Modification 12.0(23)S This command was introduced. 12.0(28)S Support was added for Multilink Frame Relay connections. 12.3(2)T This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.3(2)T. 12.2(25)S This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)S. 12.2(27)SBC This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(27)SBC. 12.
xconnect For L2TPv3, if you do not enter the encapsulation l2tpv3 manual keywords in the xconnect command, the data encapsulation type for the L2TPv3 session is taken from the encapsulation type configured for the pseudowire class specified with the pseudowire-class pw-class-name command. The pw-class keyword with the pw-class-name value binds the xconnect configuration of an attachment circuit to a specific pseudowire class.
xconnect Related Commands Command Description l2tp cookie local Configures the size of the cookie field used in the L2TPv3 headers of incoming packets received from the remote PE peer router. l2tp cookie remote Configures the size of the cookie field used in the L2TPv3 headers of outgoing packets sent from the local PE peer router. l2tp hello Specifies the use of a hello keepalive setting contained in a specified L2TP class configuration for a static L2TPv3 session.
xconnect logging pseudowire status xconnect logging pseudowire status To enable system logging (syslog) reporting of pseudowire status events, use the xconnect logging pseudowire status command in global configuration mode. To disable syslog reporting of pseudowire status events, use the no form of this command. xconnect logging pseudowire status no xconnect logging pseudowire status Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.